public inbox for [email protected]
help / color / mirror / Atom feed[PATCH 06/21] One fewer (not one less)
25+ messages / 3 participants
[nested] [flat]
* [PATCH 06/21] One fewer (not one less)
@ 2021-01-18 20:37 Justin Pryzby <[email protected]>
0 siblings, 0 replies; 25+ messages in thread
From: Justin Pryzby @ 2021-01-18 20:37 UTC (permalink / raw)
---
contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c | 2 +-
doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml | 2 +-
doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml | 2 +-
doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml | 2 +-
src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c | 4 ++--
src/backend/commands/analyze.c | 2 +-
src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c | 2 +-
src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c | 2 +-
src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c | 2 +-
src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c | 2 +-
src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c | 2 +-
src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c | 2 +-
src/include/pg_config_manual.h | 4 ++--
src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h | 2 +-
src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out | 2 +-
src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql | 2 +-
16 files changed, 18 insertions(+), 18 deletions(-)
diff --git a/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c b/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c
index 9abcee32af..f6760eb31e 100644
--- a/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c
+++ b/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c
@@ -338,7 +338,7 @@ tuple_data_split_internal(Oid relid, char *tupdata,
attr = TupleDescAttr(tupdesc, i);
/*
- * Tuple header can specify less attributes than tuple descriptor as
+ * Tuple header can specify fewer attributes than tuple descriptor as
* ALTER TABLE ADD COLUMN without DEFAULT keyword does not actually
* change tuples in pages, so attributes with numbers greater than
* (t_infomask2 & HEAP_NATTS_MASK) should be treated as NULL.
diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml
index cebc09ef91..1b00e543a6 100644
--- a/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml
+++ b/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml
@@ -619,7 +619,7 @@ SELECT * FROM test1 ORDER BY a || b COLLATE "fr_FR";
name such as <literal>de_DE</literal> can be considered unique
within a given database even though it would not be unique globally.
Use of the stripped collation names is recommended, since it will
- make one less thing you need to change if you decide to change to
+ make one fewer thing you need to change if you decide to change to
another database encoding. Note however that the <literal>default</literal>,
<literal>C</literal>, and <literal>POSIX</literal> collations can be used regardless of
the database encoding.
diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml
index 0b24a55505..693423e524 100644
--- a/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml
+++ b/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml
@@ -867,7 +867,7 @@ CREATE TYPE <replaceable class="parameter">name</replaceable>
Before <productname>PostgreSQL</productname> version 8.3, the name of
a generated array type was always exactly the element type's name with one
underscore character (<literal>_</literal>) prepended. (Type names were
- therefore restricted in length to one less character than other names.)
+ therefore restricted in length to one fewer character than other names.)
While this is still usually the case, the array type name may vary from
this in case of maximum-length names or collisions with user type names
that begin with underscore. Writing code that depends on this convention
diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml
index e81addcfa9..aa172d102b 100644
--- a/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml
+++ b/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml
@@ -1266,7 +1266,7 @@ CREATE [ OR REPLACE ] RULE <replaceable class="parameter">name</replaceable> AS
<para>
The query trees generated from rule actions are thrown into the
rewrite system again, and maybe more rules get applied resulting
- in more or less query trees.
+ in additional or fewer query trees.
So a rule's actions must have either a different
command type or a different result relation than the rule itself is
on, otherwise this recursive process will end up in an infinite loop.
diff --git a/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c b/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c
index 24a27e387d..0b56b0fa5a 100644
--- a/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c
+++ b/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c
@@ -719,11 +719,11 @@ heap_copytuple_with_tuple(HeapTuple src, HeapTuple dest)
}
/*
- * Expand a tuple which has less attributes than required. For each attribute
+ * Expand a tuple which has fewer attributes than required. For each attribute
* not present in the sourceTuple, if there is a missing value that will be
* used. Otherwise the attribute will be set to NULL.
*
- * The source tuple must have less attributes than the required number.
+ * The source tuple must have fewer attributes than the required number.
*
* Only one of targetHeapTuple and targetMinimalTuple may be supplied. The
* other argument must be NULL.
diff --git a/src/backend/commands/analyze.c b/src/backend/commands/analyze.c
index 7295cf0215..64908ac39c 100644
--- a/src/backend/commands/analyze.c
+++ b/src/backend/commands/analyze.c
@@ -1003,7 +1003,7 @@ examine_attribute(Relation onerel, int attnum, Node *index_expr)
* As of May 2004 we use a new two-stage method: Stage one selects up
* to targrows random blocks (or all blocks, if there aren't so many).
* Stage two scans these blocks and uses the Vitter algorithm to create
- * a random sample of targrows rows (or less, if there are less in the
+ * a random sample of targrows rows (or fewer, if there are fewer in the
* sample of blocks). The two stages are executed simultaneously: each
* block is processed as soon as stage one returns its number and while
* the rows are read stage two controls which ones are to be inserted
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c b/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c
index 4d185c27b4..078aaef539 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c
@@ -263,7 +263,7 @@ static int compareDatetime(Datum val1, Oid typid1, Datum val2, Oid typid2,
* implement @? and @@ operators, which in turn are intended to have an
* index support. Thus, it's desirable to make it easier to achieve
* consistency between index scan results and sequential scan results.
- * So, we throw as less errors as possible. Regarding this function,
+ * So, we throw as few errors as possible. Regarding this function,
* such behavior also matches behavior of JSON_EXISTS() clause of
* SQL/JSON. Regarding jsonb_path_match(), this function doesn't have
* an analogy in SQL/JSON, so we define its behavior on our own.
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c b/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c
index 47ca4ddbb5..52314d3aa1 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c
@@ -645,7 +645,7 @@ scalarineqsel(PlannerInfo *root, Oid operator, bool isgt, bool iseq,
/*
* The calculation so far gave us a selectivity for the "<=" case.
- * We'll have one less tuple for "<" and one additional tuple for
+ * We'll have one fewer tuple for "<" and one additional tuple for
* ">=", the latter of which we'll reverse the selectivity for
* below, so we can simply subtract one tuple for both cases. The
* cases that need this adjustment can be identified by iseq being
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c b/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c
index fa2b49c676..55c9445898 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c
@@ -1497,7 +1497,7 @@ GetCatCacheHashValue(CatCache *cache,
* It doesn't make any sense to specify all of the cache's key columns
* here: since the key is unique, there could be at most one match, so
* you ought to use SearchCatCache() instead. Hence this function takes
- * one less Datum argument than SearchCatCache() does.
+ * one fewer Datum argument than SearchCatCache() does.
*
* The caller must not modify the list object or the pointed-to tuples,
* and must call ReleaseCatCacheList() when done with the list.
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c b/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c
index 0c327e823f..7348b86682 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c
@@ -42,7 +42,7 @@ BlockSampler_Init(BlockSampler bs, BlockNumber nblocks, int samplesize,
bs->N = nblocks; /* measured table size */
/*
- * If we decide to reduce samplesize for tables that have less or not much
+ * If we decide to reduce samplesize for tables that have fewer or not much
* more than samplesize blocks, here is the place to do it.
*/
bs->n = samplesize;
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c b/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c
index e4ee1aab97..10a1effb74 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c
@@ -495,7 +495,7 @@ FreePageManagerDump(FreePageManager *fpm)
* if we search the parent page for the first key greater than or equal to
* the first key on the current page, the downlink to this page will be either
* the exact index returned by the search (if the first key decreased)
- * or one less (if the first key increased).
+ * or one fewer (if the first key increased).
*/
static void
FreePageBtreeAdjustAncestorKeys(FreePageManager *fpm, FreePageBtree *btp)
diff --git a/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c b/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c
index a4a3f40048..627a244fb7 100644
--- a/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c
+++ b/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c
@@ -6458,7 +6458,7 @@ threadRun(void *arg)
/*
* If advanceConnectionState changed client to finished state,
- * that's one less client that remains.
+ * that's one fewer client that remains.
*/
if (st->state == CSTATE_FINISHED || st->state == CSTATE_ABORTED)
remains--;
diff --git a/src/include/pg_config_manual.h b/src/include/pg_config_manual.h
index 2a12071bad..7413748a71 100644
--- a/src/include/pg_config_manual.h
+++ b/src/include/pg_config_manual.h
@@ -21,7 +21,7 @@
/*
* Maximum length for identifiers (e.g. table names, column names,
- * function names). Names actually are limited to one less byte than this,
+ * function names). Names actually are limited to one fewer byte than this,
* because the length must include a trailing zero byte.
*
* Changing this requires an initdb.
@@ -87,7 +87,7 @@
/*
* MAXPGPATH: standard size of a pathname buffer in PostgreSQL (hence,
- * maximum usable pathname length is one less).
+ * maximum usable pathname length is one fewer).
*
* We'd use a standard system header symbol for this, if there weren't
* so many to choose from: MAXPATHLEN, MAX_PATH, PATH_MAX are all
diff --git a/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h b/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h
index 67d3c7b4e4..9e73f1f1b1 100644
--- a/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h
+++ b/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h
@@ -7,7 +7,7 @@
/*
* Maximum length for identifiers (e.g. table names, column names,
- * function names). Names actually are limited to one less byte than this,
+ * function names). Names actually are limited to one fewer byte than this,
* because the length must include a trailing zero byte.
*
* This should be at least as much as NAMEDATALEN of the database the
diff --git a/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out b/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out
index 84f7eabb66..9799cfbdbd 100644
--- a/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out
+++ b/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out
@@ -4325,7 +4325,7 @@ SELECT f1, polygon(8, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
<(100,1),115> | ((-15,1),(18.6827201635,82.3172798365),(100,116),(181.317279836,82.3172798365),(215,1),(181.317279836,-80.3172798365),(100,-114),(18.6827201635,-80.3172798365))
(6 rows)
--- Too less points error
+-- Too few points error
SELECT f1, polygon(1, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
ERROR: must request at least 2 points
-- Zero radius error
diff --git a/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql b/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql
index 96df0ab05a..b0ab6d03ec 100644
--- a/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql
+++ b/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql
@@ -424,7 +424,7 @@ SELECT f1, f1::polygon FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
-- To polygon with less points
SELECT f1, polygon(8, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
--- Too less points error
+-- Too few points error
SELECT f1, polygon(1, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
-- Zero radius error
--
2.17.0
--jI8keyz6grp/JLjh
Content-Type: text/x-diff; charset=us-ascii
Content-Disposition: attachment;
filename="0007-function-comment-get_am_name.patch"
^ permalink raw reply [nested|flat] 25+ messages in thread
* [PATCH 06/18] One fewer (not one less)
@ 2021-01-18 20:37 Justin Pryzby <[email protected]>
0 siblings, 0 replies; 25+ messages in thread
From: Justin Pryzby @ 2021-01-18 20:37 UTC (permalink / raw)
---
contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c | 2 +-
doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml | 2 +-
doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml | 2 +-
doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml | 2 +-
src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c | 4 ++--
src/backend/commands/analyze.c | 2 +-
src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c | 2 +-
src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c | 2 +-
src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c | 2 +-
src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c | 2 +-
src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c | 2 +-
src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c | 2 +-
src/include/pg_config_manual.h | 4 ++--
src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h | 2 +-
src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out | 2 +-
src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql | 2 +-
16 files changed, 18 insertions(+), 18 deletions(-)
diff --git a/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c b/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c
index 9abcee32af..f6760eb31e 100644
--- a/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c
+++ b/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c
@@ -338,7 +338,7 @@ tuple_data_split_internal(Oid relid, char *tupdata,
attr = TupleDescAttr(tupdesc, i);
/*
- * Tuple header can specify less attributes than tuple descriptor as
+ * Tuple header can specify fewer attributes than tuple descriptor as
* ALTER TABLE ADD COLUMN without DEFAULT keyword does not actually
* change tuples in pages, so attributes with numbers greater than
* (t_infomask2 & HEAP_NATTS_MASK) should be treated as NULL.
diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml
index cebc09ef91..1b00e543a6 100644
--- a/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml
+++ b/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml
@@ -619,7 +619,7 @@ SELECT * FROM test1 ORDER BY a || b COLLATE "fr_FR";
name such as <literal>de_DE</literal> can be considered unique
within a given database even though it would not be unique globally.
Use of the stripped collation names is recommended, since it will
- make one less thing you need to change if you decide to change to
+ make one fewer thing you need to change if you decide to change to
another database encoding. Note however that the <literal>default</literal>,
<literal>C</literal>, and <literal>POSIX</literal> collations can be used regardless of
the database encoding.
diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml
index 0b24a55505..693423e524 100644
--- a/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml
+++ b/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml
@@ -867,7 +867,7 @@ CREATE TYPE <replaceable class="parameter">name</replaceable>
Before <productname>PostgreSQL</productname> version 8.3, the name of
a generated array type was always exactly the element type's name with one
underscore character (<literal>_</literal>) prepended. (Type names were
- therefore restricted in length to one less character than other names.)
+ therefore restricted in length to one fewer character than other names.)
While this is still usually the case, the array type name may vary from
this in case of maximum-length names or collisions with user type names
that begin with underscore. Writing code that depends on this convention
diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml
index e81addcfa9..aa172d102b 100644
--- a/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml
+++ b/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml
@@ -1266,7 +1266,7 @@ CREATE [ OR REPLACE ] RULE <replaceable class="parameter">name</replaceable> AS
<para>
The query trees generated from rule actions are thrown into the
rewrite system again, and maybe more rules get applied resulting
- in more or less query trees.
+ in additional or fewer query trees.
So a rule's actions must have either a different
command type or a different result relation than the rule itself is
on, otherwise this recursive process will end up in an infinite loop.
diff --git a/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c b/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c
index 24a27e387d..0b56b0fa5a 100644
--- a/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c
+++ b/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c
@@ -719,11 +719,11 @@ heap_copytuple_with_tuple(HeapTuple src, HeapTuple dest)
}
/*
- * Expand a tuple which has less attributes than required. For each attribute
+ * Expand a tuple which has fewer attributes than required. For each attribute
* not present in the sourceTuple, if there is a missing value that will be
* used. Otherwise the attribute will be set to NULL.
*
- * The source tuple must have less attributes than the required number.
+ * The source tuple must have fewer attributes than the required number.
*
* Only one of targetHeapTuple and targetMinimalTuple may be supplied. The
* other argument must be NULL.
diff --git a/src/backend/commands/analyze.c b/src/backend/commands/analyze.c
index 7295cf0215..64908ac39c 100644
--- a/src/backend/commands/analyze.c
+++ b/src/backend/commands/analyze.c
@@ -1003,7 +1003,7 @@ examine_attribute(Relation onerel, int attnum, Node *index_expr)
* As of May 2004 we use a new two-stage method: Stage one selects up
* to targrows random blocks (or all blocks, if there aren't so many).
* Stage two scans these blocks and uses the Vitter algorithm to create
- * a random sample of targrows rows (or less, if there are less in the
+ * a random sample of targrows rows (or fewer, if there are fewer in the
* sample of blocks). The two stages are executed simultaneously: each
* block is processed as soon as stage one returns its number and while
* the rows are read stage two controls which ones are to be inserted
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c b/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c
index 4d185c27b4..078aaef539 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c
@@ -263,7 +263,7 @@ static int compareDatetime(Datum val1, Oid typid1, Datum val2, Oid typid2,
* implement @? and @@ operators, which in turn are intended to have an
* index support. Thus, it's desirable to make it easier to achieve
* consistency between index scan results and sequential scan results.
- * So, we throw as less errors as possible. Regarding this function,
+ * So, we throw as few errors as possible. Regarding this function,
* such behavior also matches behavior of JSON_EXISTS() clause of
* SQL/JSON. Regarding jsonb_path_match(), this function doesn't have
* an analogy in SQL/JSON, so we define its behavior on our own.
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c b/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c
index 47ca4ddbb5..52314d3aa1 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c
@@ -645,7 +645,7 @@ scalarineqsel(PlannerInfo *root, Oid operator, bool isgt, bool iseq,
/*
* The calculation so far gave us a selectivity for the "<=" case.
- * We'll have one less tuple for "<" and one additional tuple for
+ * We'll have one fewer tuple for "<" and one additional tuple for
* ">=", the latter of which we'll reverse the selectivity for
* below, so we can simply subtract one tuple for both cases. The
* cases that need this adjustment can be identified by iseq being
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c b/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c
index fa2b49c676..55c9445898 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c
@@ -1497,7 +1497,7 @@ GetCatCacheHashValue(CatCache *cache,
* It doesn't make any sense to specify all of the cache's key columns
* here: since the key is unique, there could be at most one match, so
* you ought to use SearchCatCache() instead. Hence this function takes
- * one less Datum argument than SearchCatCache() does.
+ * one fewer Datum argument than SearchCatCache() does.
*
* The caller must not modify the list object or the pointed-to tuples,
* and must call ReleaseCatCacheList() when done with the list.
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c b/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c
index 0c327e823f..7348b86682 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c
@@ -42,7 +42,7 @@ BlockSampler_Init(BlockSampler bs, BlockNumber nblocks, int samplesize,
bs->N = nblocks; /* measured table size */
/*
- * If we decide to reduce samplesize for tables that have less or not much
+ * If we decide to reduce samplesize for tables that have fewer or not much
* more than samplesize blocks, here is the place to do it.
*/
bs->n = samplesize;
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c b/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c
index e4ee1aab97..10a1effb74 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c
@@ -495,7 +495,7 @@ FreePageManagerDump(FreePageManager *fpm)
* if we search the parent page for the first key greater than or equal to
* the first key on the current page, the downlink to this page will be either
* the exact index returned by the search (if the first key decreased)
- * or one less (if the first key increased).
+ * or one fewer (if the first key increased).
*/
static void
FreePageBtreeAdjustAncestorKeys(FreePageManager *fpm, FreePageBtree *btp)
diff --git a/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c b/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c
index a4a3f40048..627a244fb7 100644
--- a/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c
+++ b/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c
@@ -6458,7 +6458,7 @@ threadRun(void *arg)
/*
* If advanceConnectionState changed client to finished state,
- * that's one less client that remains.
+ * that's one fewer client that remains.
*/
if (st->state == CSTATE_FINISHED || st->state == CSTATE_ABORTED)
remains--;
diff --git a/src/include/pg_config_manual.h b/src/include/pg_config_manual.h
index d27c8601fa..e3d2e751ea 100644
--- a/src/include/pg_config_manual.h
+++ b/src/include/pg_config_manual.h
@@ -21,7 +21,7 @@
/*
* Maximum length for identifiers (e.g. table names, column names,
- * function names). Names actually are limited to one less byte than this,
+ * function names). Names actually are limited to one fewer byte than this,
* because the length must include a trailing zero byte.
*
* Changing this requires an initdb.
@@ -87,7 +87,7 @@
/*
* MAXPGPATH: standard size of a pathname buffer in PostgreSQL (hence,
- * maximum usable pathname length is one less).
+ * maximum usable pathname length is one fewer).
*
* We'd use a standard system header symbol for this, if there weren't
* so many to choose from: MAXPATHLEN, MAX_PATH, PATH_MAX are all
diff --git a/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h b/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h
index 67d3c7b4e4..9e73f1f1b1 100644
--- a/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h
+++ b/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h
@@ -7,7 +7,7 @@
/*
* Maximum length for identifiers (e.g. table names, column names,
- * function names). Names actually are limited to one less byte than this,
+ * function names). Names actually are limited to one fewer byte than this,
* because the length must include a trailing zero byte.
*
* This should be at least as much as NAMEDATALEN of the database the
diff --git a/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out b/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out
index 84f7eabb66..9799cfbdbd 100644
--- a/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out
+++ b/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out
@@ -4325,7 +4325,7 @@ SELECT f1, polygon(8, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
<(100,1),115> | ((-15,1),(18.6827201635,82.3172798365),(100,116),(181.317279836,82.3172798365),(215,1),(181.317279836,-80.3172798365),(100,-114),(18.6827201635,-80.3172798365))
(6 rows)
--- Too less points error
+-- Too few points error
SELECT f1, polygon(1, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
ERROR: must request at least 2 points
-- Zero radius error
diff --git a/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql b/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql
index 96df0ab05a..b0ab6d03ec 100644
--- a/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql
+++ b/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql
@@ -424,7 +424,7 @@ SELECT f1, f1::polygon FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
-- To polygon with less points
SELECT f1, polygon(8, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
--- Too less points error
+-- Too few points error
SELECT f1, polygon(1, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
-- Zero radius error
--
2.17.0
--lc9FT7cWel8HagAv
Content-Type: text/x-diff; charset=us-ascii
Content-Disposition: attachment;
filename="0007-function-comment-get_am_name.patch"
^ permalink raw reply [nested|flat] 25+ messages in thread
* [PATCH 06/18] One fewer (not one less)
@ 2021-01-18 20:37 Justin Pryzby <[email protected]>
0 siblings, 0 replies; 25+ messages in thread
From: Justin Pryzby @ 2021-01-18 20:37 UTC (permalink / raw)
---
contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c | 2 +-
doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml | 2 +-
doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml | 2 +-
doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml | 2 +-
src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c | 4 ++--
src/backend/commands/analyze.c | 2 +-
src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c | 2 +-
src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c | 2 +-
src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c | 2 +-
src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c | 2 +-
src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c | 2 +-
src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c | 2 +-
src/include/pg_config_manual.h | 4 ++--
src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h | 2 +-
src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out | 2 +-
src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql | 2 +-
16 files changed, 18 insertions(+), 18 deletions(-)
diff --git a/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c b/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c
index 9abcee32af..f6760eb31e 100644
--- a/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c
+++ b/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c
@@ -338,7 +338,7 @@ tuple_data_split_internal(Oid relid, char *tupdata,
attr = TupleDescAttr(tupdesc, i);
/*
- * Tuple header can specify less attributes than tuple descriptor as
+ * Tuple header can specify fewer attributes than tuple descriptor as
* ALTER TABLE ADD COLUMN without DEFAULT keyword does not actually
* change tuples in pages, so attributes with numbers greater than
* (t_infomask2 & HEAP_NATTS_MASK) should be treated as NULL.
diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml
index cebc09ef91..1b00e543a6 100644
--- a/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml
+++ b/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml
@@ -619,7 +619,7 @@ SELECT * FROM test1 ORDER BY a || b COLLATE "fr_FR";
name such as <literal>de_DE</literal> can be considered unique
within a given database even though it would not be unique globally.
Use of the stripped collation names is recommended, since it will
- make one less thing you need to change if you decide to change to
+ make one fewer thing you need to change if you decide to change to
another database encoding. Note however that the <literal>default</literal>,
<literal>C</literal>, and <literal>POSIX</literal> collations can be used regardless of
the database encoding.
diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml
index 0b24a55505..693423e524 100644
--- a/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml
+++ b/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml
@@ -867,7 +867,7 @@ CREATE TYPE <replaceable class="parameter">name</replaceable>
Before <productname>PostgreSQL</productname> version 8.3, the name of
a generated array type was always exactly the element type's name with one
underscore character (<literal>_</literal>) prepended. (Type names were
- therefore restricted in length to one less character than other names.)
+ therefore restricted in length to one fewer character than other names.)
While this is still usually the case, the array type name may vary from
this in case of maximum-length names or collisions with user type names
that begin with underscore. Writing code that depends on this convention
diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml
index e81addcfa9..aa172d102b 100644
--- a/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml
+++ b/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml
@@ -1266,7 +1266,7 @@ CREATE [ OR REPLACE ] RULE <replaceable class="parameter">name</replaceable> AS
<para>
The query trees generated from rule actions are thrown into the
rewrite system again, and maybe more rules get applied resulting
- in more or less query trees.
+ in additional or fewer query trees.
So a rule's actions must have either a different
command type or a different result relation than the rule itself is
on, otherwise this recursive process will end up in an infinite loop.
diff --git a/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c b/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c
index 24a27e387d..0b56b0fa5a 100644
--- a/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c
+++ b/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c
@@ -719,11 +719,11 @@ heap_copytuple_with_tuple(HeapTuple src, HeapTuple dest)
}
/*
- * Expand a tuple which has less attributes than required. For each attribute
+ * Expand a tuple which has fewer attributes than required. For each attribute
* not present in the sourceTuple, if there is a missing value that will be
* used. Otherwise the attribute will be set to NULL.
*
- * The source tuple must have less attributes than the required number.
+ * The source tuple must have fewer attributes than the required number.
*
* Only one of targetHeapTuple and targetMinimalTuple may be supplied. The
* other argument must be NULL.
diff --git a/src/backend/commands/analyze.c b/src/backend/commands/analyze.c
index 7295cf0215..64908ac39c 100644
--- a/src/backend/commands/analyze.c
+++ b/src/backend/commands/analyze.c
@@ -1003,7 +1003,7 @@ examine_attribute(Relation onerel, int attnum, Node *index_expr)
* As of May 2004 we use a new two-stage method: Stage one selects up
* to targrows random blocks (or all blocks, if there aren't so many).
* Stage two scans these blocks and uses the Vitter algorithm to create
- * a random sample of targrows rows (or less, if there are less in the
+ * a random sample of targrows rows (or fewer, if there are fewer in the
* sample of blocks). The two stages are executed simultaneously: each
* block is processed as soon as stage one returns its number and while
* the rows are read stage two controls which ones are to be inserted
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c b/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c
index 4d185c27b4..078aaef539 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c
@@ -263,7 +263,7 @@ static int compareDatetime(Datum val1, Oid typid1, Datum val2, Oid typid2,
* implement @? and @@ operators, which in turn are intended to have an
* index support. Thus, it's desirable to make it easier to achieve
* consistency between index scan results and sequential scan results.
- * So, we throw as less errors as possible. Regarding this function,
+ * So, we throw as few errors as possible. Regarding this function,
* such behavior also matches behavior of JSON_EXISTS() clause of
* SQL/JSON. Regarding jsonb_path_match(), this function doesn't have
* an analogy in SQL/JSON, so we define its behavior on our own.
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c b/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c
index 47ca4ddbb5..52314d3aa1 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c
@@ -645,7 +645,7 @@ scalarineqsel(PlannerInfo *root, Oid operator, bool isgt, bool iseq,
/*
* The calculation so far gave us a selectivity for the "<=" case.
- * We'll have one less tuple for "<" and one additional tuple for
+ * We'll have one fewer tuple for "<" and one additional tuple for
* ">=", the latter of which we'll reverse the selectivity for
* below, so we can simply subtract one tuple for both cases. The
* cases that need this adjustment can be identified by iseq being
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c b/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c
index fa2b49c676..55c9445898 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c
@@ -1497,7 +1497,7 @@ GetCatCacheHashValue(CatCache *cache,
* It doesn't make any sense to specify all of the cache's key columns
* here: since the key is unique, there could be at most one match, so
* you ought to use SearchCatCache() instead. Hence this function takes
- * one less Datum argument than SearchCatCache() does.
+ * one fewer Datum argument than SearchCatCache() does.
*
* The caller must not modify the list object or the pointed-to tuples,
* and must call ReleaseCatCacheList() when done with the list.
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c b/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c
index 0c327e823f..7348b86682 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c
@@ -42,7 +42,7 @@ BlockSampler_Init(BlockSampler bs, BlockNumber nblocks, int samplesize,
bs->N = nblocks; /* measured table size */
/*
- * If we decide to reduce samplesize for tables that have less or not much
+ * If we decide to reduce samplesize for tables that have fewer or not much
* more than samplesize blocks, here is the place to do it.
*/
bs->n = samplesize;
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c b/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c
index e4ee1aab97..10a1effb74 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c
@@ -495,7 +495,7 @@ FreePageManagerDump(FreePageManager *fpm)
* if we search the parent page for the first key greater than or equal to
* the first key on the current page, the downlink to this page will be either
* the exact index returned by the search (if the first key decreased)
- * or one less (if the first key increased).
+ * or one fewer (if the first key increased).
*/
static void
FreePageBtreeAdjustAncestorKeys(FreePageManager *fpm, FreePageBtree *btp)
diff --git a/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c b/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c
index a4a3f40048..627a244fb7 100644
--- a/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c
+++ b/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c
@@ -6458,7 +6458,7 @@ threadRun(void *arg)
/*
* If advanceConnectionState changed client to finished state,
- * that's one less client that remains.
+ * that's one fewer client that remains.
*/
if (st->state == CSTATE_FINISHED || st->state == CSTATE_ABORTED)
remains--;
diff --git a/src/include/pg_config_manual.h b/src/include/pg_config_manual.h
index d27c8601fa..e3d2e751ea 100644
--- a/src/include/pg_config_manual.h
+++ b/src/include/pg_config_manual.h
@@ -21,7 +21,7 @@
/*
* Maximum length for identifiers (e.g. table names, column names,
- * function names). Names actually are limited to one less byte than this,
+ * function names). Names actually are limited to one fewer byte than this,
* because the length must include a trailing zero byte.
*
* Changing this requires an initdb.
@@ -87,7 +87,7 @@
/*
* MAXPGPATH: standard size of a pathname buffer in PostgreSQL (hence,
- * maximum usable pathname length is one less).
+ * maximum usable pathname length is one fewer).
*
* We'd use a standard system header symbol for this, if there weren't
* so many to choose from: MAXPATHLEN, MAX_PATH, PATH_MAX are all
diff --git a/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h b/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h
index 67d3c7b4e4..9e73f1f1b1 100644
--- a/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h
+++ b/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h
@@ -7,7 +7,7 @@
/*
* Maximum length for identifiers (e.g. table names, column names,
- * function names). Names actually are limited to one less byte than this,
+ * function names). Names actually are limited to one fewer byte than this,
* because the length must include a trailing zero byte.
*
* This should be at least as much as NAMEDATALEN of the database the
diff --git a/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out b/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out
index 84f7eabb66..9799cfbdbd 100644
--- a/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out
+++ b/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out
@@ -4325,7 +4325,7 @@ SELECT f1, polygon(8, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
<(100,1),115> | ((-15,1),(18.6827201635,82.3172798365),(100,116),(181.317279836,82.3172798365),(215,1),(181.317279836,-80.3172798365),(100,-114),(18.6827201635,-80.3172798365))
(6 rows)
--- Too less points error
+-- Too few points error
SELECT f1, polygon(1, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
ERROR: must request at least 2 points
-- Zero radius error
diff --git a/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql b/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql
index 96df0ab05a..b0ab6d03ec 100644
--- a/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql
+++ b/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql
@@ -424,7 +424,7 @@ SELECT f1, f1::polygon FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
-- To polygon with less points
SELECT f1, polygon(8, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
--- Too less points error
+-- Too few points error
SELECT f1, polygon(1, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
-- Zero radius error
--
2.17.0
--lc9FT7cWel8HagAv
Content-Type: text/x-diff; charset=us-ascii
Content-Disposition: attachment;
filename="0007-function-comment-get_am_name.patch"
^ permalink raw reply [nested|flat] 25+ messages in thread
* [PATCH 06/18] One fewer (not one less)
@ 2021-01-18 20:37 Justin Pryzby <[email protected]>
0 siblings, 0 replies; 25+ messages in thread
From: Justin Pryzby @ 2021-01-18 20:37 UTC (permalink / raw)
---
contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c | 2 +-
doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml | 2 +-
doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml | 2 +-
doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml | 2 +-
src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c | 4 ++--
src/backend/commands/analyze.c | 2 +-
src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c | 2 +-
src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c | 2 +-
src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c | 2 +-
src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c | 2 +-
src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c | 2 +-
src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c | 2 +-
src/include/pg_config_manual.h | 4 ++--
src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h | 2 +-
src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out | 2 +-
src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql | 2 +-
16 files changed, 18 insertions(+), 18 deletions(-)
diff --git a/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c b/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c
index 9abcee32af..f6760eb31e 100644
--- a/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c
+++ b/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c
@@ -338,7 +338,7 @@ tuple_data_split_internal(Oid relid, char *tupdata,
attr = TupleDescAttr(tupdesc, i);
/*
- * Tuple header can specify less attributes than tuple descriptor as
+ * Tuple header can specify fewer attributes than tuple descriptor as
* ALTER TABLE ADD COLUMN without DEFAULT keyword does not actually
* change tuples in pages, so attributes with numbers greater than
* (t_infomask2 & HEAP_NATTS_MASK) should be treated as NULL.
diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml
index cebc09ef91..1b00e543a6 100644
--- a/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml
+++ b/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml
@@ -619,7 +619,7 @@ SELECT * FROM test1 ORDER BY a || b COLLATE "fr_FR";
name such as <literal>de_DE</literal> can be considered unique
within a given database even though it would not be unique globally.
Use of the stripped collation names is recommended, since it will
- make one less thing you need to change if you decide to change to
+ make one fewer thing you need to change if you decide to change to
another database encoding. Note however that the <literal>default</literal>,
<literal>C</literal>, and <literal>POSIX</literal> collations can be used regardless of
the database encoding.
diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml
index 0b24a55505..693423e524 100644
--- a/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml
+++ b/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml
@@ -867,7 +867,7 @@ CREATE TYPE <replaceable class="parameter">name</replaceable>
Before <productname>PostgreSQL</productname> version 8.3, the name of
a generated array type was always exactly the element type's name with one
underscore character (<literal>_</literal>) prepended. (Type names were
- therefore restricted in length to one less character than other names.)
+ therefore restricted in length to one fewer character than other names.)
While this is still usually the case, the array type name may vary from
this in case of maximum-length names or collisions with user type names
that begin with underscore. Writing code that depends on this convention
diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml
index e81addcfa9..aa172d102b 100644
--- a/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml
+++ b/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml
@@ -1266,7 +1266,7 @@ CREATE [ OR REPLACE ] RULE <replaceable class="parameter">name</replaceable> AS
<para>
The query trees generated from rule actions are thrown into the
rewrite system again, and maybe more rules get applied resulting
- in more or less query trees.
+ in additional or fewer query trees.
So a rule's actions must have either a different
command type or a different result relation than the rule itself is
on, otherwise this recursive process will end up in an infinite loop.
diff --git a/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c b/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c
index 24a27e387d..0b56b0fa5a 100644
--- a/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c
+++ b/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c
@@ -719,11 +719,11 @@ heap_copytuple_with_tuple(HeapTuple src, HeapTuple dest)
}
/*
- * Expand a tuple which has less attributes than required. For each attribute
+ * Expand a tuple which has fewer attributes than required. For each attribute
* not present in the sourceTuple, if there is a missing value that will be
* used. Otherwise the attribute will be set to NULL.
*
- * The source tuple must have less attributes than the required number.
+ * The source tuple must have fewer attributes than the required number.
*
* Only one of targetHeapTuple and targetMinimalTuple may be supplied. The
* other argument must be NULL.
diff --git a/src/backend/commands/analyze.c b/src/backend/commands/analyze.c
index 7295cf0215..64908ac39c 100644
--- a/src/backend/commands/analyze.c
+++ b/src/backend/commands/analyze.c
@@ -1003,7 +1003,7 @@ examine_attribute(Relation onerel, int attnum, Node *index_expr)
* As of May 2004 we use a new two-stage method: Stage one selects up
* to targrows random blocks (or all blocks, if there aren't so many).
* Stage two scans these blocks and uses the Vitter algorithm to create
- * a random sample of targrows rows (or less, if there are less in the
+ * a random sample of targrows rows (or fewer, if there are fewer in the
* sample of blocks). The two stages are executed simultaneously: each
* block is processed as soon as stage one returns its number and while
* the rows are read stage two controls which ones are to be inserted
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c b/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c
index 4d185c27b4..078aaef539 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c
@@ -263,7 +263,7 @@ static int compareDatetime(Datum val1, Oid typid1, Datum val2, Oid typid2,
* implement @? and @@ operators, which in turn are intended to have an
* index support. Thus, it's desirable to make it easier to achieve
* consistency between index scan results and sequential scan results.
- * So, we throw as less errors as possible. Regarding this function,
+ * So, we throw as few errors as possible. Regarding this function,
* such behavior also matches behavior of JSON_EXISTS() clause of
* SQL/JSON. Regarding jsonb_path_match(), this function doesn't have
* an analogy in SQL/JSON, so we define its behavior on our own.
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c b/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c
index 47ca4ddbb5..52314d3aa1 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c
@@ -645,7 +645,7 @@ scalarineqsel(PlannerInfo *root, Oid operator, bool isgt, bool iseq,
/*
* The calculation so far gave us a selectivity for the "<=" case.
- * We'll have one less tuple for "<" and one additional tuple for
+ * We'll have one fewer tuple for "<" and one additional tuple for
* ">=", the latter of which we'll reverse the selectivity for
* below, so we can simply subtract one tuple for both cases. The
* cases that need this adjustment can be identified by iseq being
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c b/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c
index fa2b49c676..55c9445898 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c
@@ -1497,7 +1497,7 @@ GetCatCacheHashValue(CatCache *cache,
* It doesn't make any sense to specify all of the cache's key columns
* here: since the key is unique, there could be at most one match, so
* you ought to use SearchCatCache() instead. Hence this function takes
- * one less Datum argument than SearchCatCache() does.
+ * one fewer Datum argument than SearchCatCache() does.
*
* The caller must not modify the list object or the pointed-to tuples,
* and must call ReleaseCatCacheList() when done with the list.
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c b/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c
index 0c327e823f..7348b86682 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c
@@ -42,7 +42,7 @@ BlockSampler_Init(BlockSampler bs, BlockNumber nblocks, int samplesize,
bs->N = nblocks; /* measured table size */
/*
- * If we decide to reduce samplesize for tables that have less or not much
+ * If we decide to reduce samplesize for tables that have fewer or not much
* more than samplesize blocks, here is the place to do it.
*/
bs->n = samplesize;
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c b/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c
index e4ee1aab97..10a1effb74 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c
@@ -495,7 +495,7 @@ FreePageManagerDump(FreePageManager *fpm)
* if we search the parent page for the first key greater than or equal to
* the first key on the current page, the downlink to this page will be either
* the exact index returned by the search (if the first key decreased)
- * or one less (if the first key increased).
+ * or one fewer (if the first key increased).
*/
static void
FreePageBtreeAdjustAncestorKeys(FreePageManager *fpm, FreePageBtree *btp)
diff --git a/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c b/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c
index a4a3f40048..627a244fb7 100644
--- a/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c
+++ b/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c
@@ -6458,7 +6458,7 @@ threadRun(void *arg)
/*
* If advanceConnectionState changed client to finished state,
- * that's one less client that remains.
+ * that's one fewer client that remains.
*/
if (st->state == CSTATE_FINISHED || st->state == CSTATE_ABORTED)
remains--;
diff --git a/src/include/pg_config_manual.h b/src/include/pg_config_manual.h
index d27c8601fa..e3d2e751ea 100644
--- a/src/include/pg_config_manual.h
+++ b/src/include/pg_config_manual.h
@@ -21,7 +21,7 @@
/*
* Maximum length for identifiers (e.g. table names, column names,
- * function names). Names actually are limited to one less byte than this,
+ * function names). Names actually are limited to one fewer byte than this,
* because the length must include a trailing zero byte.
*
* Changing this requires an initdb.
@@ -87,7 +87,7 @@
/*
* MAXPGPATH: standard size of a pathname buffer in PostgreSQL (hence,
- * maximum usable pathname length is one less).
+ * maximum usable pathname length is one fewer).
*
* We'd use a standard system header symbol for this, if there weren't
* so many to choose from: MAXPATHLEN, MAX_PATH, PATH_MAX are all
diff --git a/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h b/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h
index 67d3c7b4e4..9e73f1f1b1 100644
--- a/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h
+++ b/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h
@@ -7,7 +7,7 @@
/*
* Maximum length for identifiers (e.g. table names, column names,
- * function names). Names actually are limited to one less byte than this,
+ * function names). Names actually are limited to one fewer byte than this,
* because the length must include a trailing zero byte.
*
* This should be at least as much as NAMEDATALEN of the database the
diff --git a/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out b/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out
index 84f7eabb66..9799cfbdbd 100644
--- a/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out
+++ b/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out
@@ -4325,7 +4325,7 @@ SELECT f1, polygon(8, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
<(100,1),115> | ((-15,1),(18.6827201635,82.3172798365),(100,116),(181.317279836,82.3172798365),(215,1),(181.317279836,-80.3172798365),(100,-114),(18.6827201635,-80.3172798365))
(6 rows)
--- Too less points error
+-- Too few points error
SELECT f1, polygon(1, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
ERROR: must request at least 2 points
-- Zero radius error
diff --git a/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql b/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql
index 96df0ab05a..b0ab6d03ec 100644
--- a/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql
+++ b/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql
@@ -424,7 +424,7 @@ SELECT f1, f1::polygon FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
-- To polygon with less points
SELECT f1, polygon(8, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
--- Too less points error
+-- Too few points error
SELECT f1, polygon(1, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
-- Zero radius error
--
2.17.0
--lc9FT7cWel8HagAv
Content-Type: text/x-diff; charset=us-ascii
Content-Disposition: attachment;
filename="0007-function-comment-get_am_name.patch"
^ permalink raw reply [nested|flat] 25+ messages in thread
* [PATCH 06/18] One fewer (not one less)
@ 2021-01-18 20:37 Justin Pryzby <[email protected]>
0 siblings, 0 replies; 25+ messages in thread
From: Justin Pryzby @ 2021-01-18 20:37 UTC (permalink / raw)
---
contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c | 2 +-
doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml | 2 +-
doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml | 2 +-
doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml | 2 +-
src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c | 4 ++--
src/backend/commands/analyze.c | 2 +-
src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c | 2 +-
src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c | 2 +-
src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c | 2 +-
src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c | 2 +-
src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c | 2 +-
src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c | 2 +-
src/include/pg_config_manual.h | 4 ++--
src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h | 2 +-
src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out | 2 +-
src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql | 2 +-
16 files changed, 18 insertions(+), 18 deletions(-)
diff --git a/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c b/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c
index 9abcee32af..f6760eb31e 100644
--- a/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c
+++ b/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c
@@ -338,7 +338,7 @@ tuple_data_split_internal(Oid relid, char *tupdata,
attr = TupleDescAttr(tupdesc, i);
/*
- * Tuple header can specify less attributes than tuple descriptor as
+ * Tuple header can specify fewer attributes than tuple descriptor as
* ALTER TABLE ADD COLUMN without DEFAULT keyword does not actually
* change tuples in pages, so attributes with numbers greater than
* (t_infomask2 & HEAP_NATTS_MASK) should be treated as NULL.
diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml
index cebc09ef91..1b00e543a6 100644
--- a/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml
+++ b/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml
@@ -619,7 +619,7 @@ SELECT * FROM test1 ORDER BY a || b COLLATE "fr_FR";
name such as <literal>de_DE</literal> can be considered unique
within a given database even though it would not be unique globally.
Use of the stripped collation names is recommended, since it will
- make one less thing you need to change if you decide to change to
+ make one fewer thing you need to change if you decide to change to
another database encoding. Note however that the <literal>default</literal>,
<literal>C</literal>, and <literal>POSIX</literal> collations can be used regardless of
the database encoding.
diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml
index 0b24a55505..693423e524 100644
--- a/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml
+++ b/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml
@@ -867,7 +867,7 @@ CREATE TYPE <replaceable class="parameter">name</replaceable>
Before <productname>PostgreSQL</productname> version 8.3, the name of
a generated array type was always exactly the element type's name with one
underscore character (<literal>_</literal>) prepended. (Type names were
- therefore restricted in length to one less character than other names.)
+ therefore restricted in length to one fewer character than other names.)
While this is still usually the case, the array type name may vary from
this in case of maximum-length names or collisions with user type names
that begin with underscore. Writing code that depends on this convention
diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml
index e81addcfa9..aa172d102b 100644
--- a/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml
+++ b/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml
@@ -1266,7 +1266,7 @@ CREATE [ OR REPLACE ] RULE <replaceable class="parameter">name</replaceable> AS
<para>
The query trees generated from rule actions are thrown into the
rewrite system again, and maybe more rules get applied resulting
- in more or less query trees.
+ in additional or fewer query trees.
So a rule's actions must have either a different
command type or a different result relation than the rule itself is
on, otherwise this recursive process will end up in an infinite loop.
diff --git a/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c b/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c
index 24a27e387d..0b56b0fa5a 100644
--- a/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c
+++ b/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c
@@ -719,11 +719,11 @@ heap_copytuple_with_tuple(HeapTuple src, HeapTuple dest)
}
/*
- * Expand a tuple which has less attributes than required. For each attribute
+ * Expand a tuple which has fewer attributes than required. For each attribute
* not present in the sourceTuple, if there is a missing value that will be
* used. Otherwise the attribute will be set to NULL.
*
- * The source tuple must have less attributes than the required number.
+ * The source tuple must have fewer attributes than the required number.
*
* Only one of targetHeapTuple and targetMinimalTuple may be supplied. The
* other argument must be NULL.
diff --git a/src/backend/commands/analyze.c b/src/backend/commands/analyze.c
index 7295cf0215..64908ac39c 100644
--- a/src/backend/commands/analyze.c
+++ b/src/backend/commands/analyze.c
@@ -1003,7 +1003,7 @@ examine_attribute(Relation onerel, int attnum, Node *index_expr)
* As of May 2004 we use a new two-stage method: Stage one selects up
* to targrows random blocks (or all blocks, if there aren't so many).
* Stage two scans these blocks and uses the Vitter algorithm to create
- * a random sample of targrows rows (or less, if there are less in the
+ * a random sample of targrows rows (or fewer, if there are fewer in the
* sample of blocks). The two stages are executed simultaneously: each
* block is processed as soon as stage one returns its number and while
* the rows are read stage two controls which ones are to be inserted
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c b/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c
index 4d185c27b4..078aaef539 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c
@@ -263,7 +263,7 @@ static int compareDatetime(Datum val1, Oid typid1, Datum val2, Oid typid2,
* implement @? and @@ operators, which in turn are intended to have an
* index support. Thus, it's desirable to make it easier to achieve
* consistency between index scan results and sequential scan results.
- * So, we throw as less errors as possible. Regarding this function,
+ * So, we throw as few errors as possible. Regarding this function,
* such behavior also matches behavior of JSON_EXISTS() clause of
* SQL/JSON. Regarding jsonb_path_match(), this function doesn't have
* an analogy in SQL/JSON, so we define its behavior on our own.
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c b/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c
index 47ca4ddbb5..52314d3aa1 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c
@@ -645,7 +645,7 @@ scalarineqsel(PlannerInfo *root, Oid operator, bool isgt, bool iseq,
/*
* The calculation so far gave us a selectivity for the "<=" case.
- * We'll have one less tuple for "<" and one additional tuple for
+ * We'll have one fewer tuple for "<" and one additional tuple for
* ">=", the latter of which we'll reverse the selectivity for
* below, so we can simply subtract one tuple for both cases. The
* cases that need this adjustment can be identified by iseq being
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c b/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c
index fa2b49c676..55c9445898 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c
@@ -1497,7 +1497,7 @@ GetCatCacheHashValue(CatCache *cache,
* It doesn't make any sense to specify all of the cache's key columns
* here: since the key is unique, there could be at most one match, so
* you ought to use SearchCatCache() instead. Hence this function takes
- * one less Datum argument than SearchCatCache() does.
+ * one fewer Datum argument than SearchCatCache() does.
*
* The caller must not modify the list object or the pointed-to tuples,
* and must call ReleaseCatCacheList() when done with the list.
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c b/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c
index 0c327e823f..7348b86682 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c
@@ -42,7 +42,7 @@ BlockSampler_Init(BlockSampler bs, BlockNumber nblocks, int samplesize,
bs->N = nblocks; /* measured table size */
/*
- * If we decide to reduce samplesize for tables that have less or not much
+ * If we decide to reduce samplesize for tables that have fewer or not much
* more than samplesize blocks, here is the place to do it.
*/
bs->n = samplesize;
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c b/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c
index e4ee1aab97..10a1effb74 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c
@@ -495,7 +495,7 @@ FreePageManagerDump(FreePageManager *fpm)
* if we search the parent page for the first key greater than or equal to
* the first key on the current page, the downlink to this page will be either
* the exact index returned by the search (if the first key decreased)
- * or one less (if the first key increased).
+ * or one fewer (if the first key increased).
*/
static void
FreePageBtreeAdjustAncestorKeys(FreePageManager *fpm, FreePageBtree *btp)
diff --git a/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c b/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c
index a4a3f40048..627a244fb7 100644
--- a/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c
+++ b/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c
@@ -6458,7 +6458,7 @@ threadRun(void *arg)
/*
* If advanceConnectionState changed client to finished state,
- * that's one less client that remains.
+ * that's one fewer client that remains.
*/
if (st->state == CSTATE_FINISHED || st->state == CSTATE_ABORTED)
remains--;
diff --git a/src/include/pg_config_manual.h b/src/include/pg_config_manual.h
index d27c8601fa..e3d2e751ea 100644
--- a/src/include/pg_config_manual.h
+++ b/src/include/pg_config_manual.h
@@ -21,7 +21,7 @@
/*
* Maximum length for identifiers (e.g. table names, column names,
- * function names). Names actually are limited to one less byte than this,
+ * function names). Names actually are limited to one fewer byte than this,
* because the length must include a trailing zero byte.
*
* Changing this requires an initdb.
@@ -87,7 +87,7 @@
/*
* MAXPGPATH: standard size of a pathname buffer in PostgreSQL (hence,
- * maximum usable pathname length is one less).
+ * maximum usable pathname length is one fewer).
*
* We'd use a standard system header symbol for this, if there weren't
* so many to choose from: MAXPATHLEN, MAX_PATH, PATH_MAX are all
diff --git a/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h b/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h
index 67d3c7b4e4..9e73f1f1b1 100644
--- a/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h
+++ b/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h
@@ -7,7 +7,7 @@
/*
* Maximum length for identifiers (e.g. table names, column names,
- * function names). Names actually are limited to one less byte than this,
+ * function names). Names actually are limited to one fewer byte than this,
* because the length must include a trailing zero byte.
*
* This should be at least as much as NAMEDATALEN of the database the
diff --git a/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out b/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out
index 84f7eabb66..9799cfbdbd 100644
--- a/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out
+++ b/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out
@@ -4325,7 +4325,7 @@ SELECT f1, polygon(8, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
<(100,1),115> | ((-15,1),(18.6827201635,82.3172798365),(100,116),(181.317279836,82.3172798365),(215,1),(181.317279836,-80.3172798365),(100,-114),(18.6827201635,-80.3172798365))
(6 rows)
--- Too less points error
+-- Too few points error
SELECT f1, polygon(1, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
ERROR: must request at least 2 points
-- Zero radius error
diff --git a/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql b/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql
index 96df0ab05a..b0ab6d03ec 100644
--- a/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql
+++ b/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql
@@ -424,7 +424,7 @@ SELECT f1, f1::polygon FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
-- To polygon with less points
SELECT f1, polygon(8, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
--- Too less points error
+-- Too few points error
SELECT f1, polygon(1, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
-- Zero radius error
--
2.17.0
--lc9FT7cWel8HagAv
Content-Type: text/x-diff; charset=us-ascii
Content-Disposition: attachment;
filename="0007-function-comment-get_am_name.patch"
^ permalink raw reply [nested|flat] 25+ messages in thread
* [PATCH 06/18] One fewer (not one less)
@ 2021-01-18 20:37 Justin Pryzby <[email protected]>
0 siblings, 0 replies; 25+ messages in thread
From: Justin Pryzby @ 2021-01-18 20:37 UTC (permalink / raw)
---
contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c | 2 +-
doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml | 2 +-
doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml | 2 +-
doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml | 2 +-
src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c | 4 ++--
src/backend/commands/analyze.c | 2 +-
src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c | 2 +-
src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c | 2 +-
src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c | 2 +-
src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c | 2 +-
src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c | 2 +-
src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c | 2 +-
src/include/pg_config_manual.h | 4 ++--
src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h | 2 +-
src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out | 2 +-
src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql | 2 +-
16 files changed, 18 insertions(+), 18 deletions(-)
diff --git a/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c b/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c
index 9abcee32af..f6760eb31e 100644
--- a/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c
+++ b/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c
@@ -338,7 +338,7 @@ tuple_data_split_internal(Oid relid, char *tupdata,
attr = TupleDescAttr(tupdesc, i);
/*
- * Tuple header can specify less attributes than tuple descriptor as
+ * Tuple header can specify fewer attributes than tuple descriptor as
* ALTER TABLE ADD COLUMN without DEFAULT keyword does not actually
* change tuples in pages, so attributes with numbers greater than
* (t_infomask2 & HEAP_NATTS_MASK) should be treated as NULL.
diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml
index cebc09ef91..1b00e543a6 100644
--- a/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml
+++ b/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml
@@ -619,7 +619,7 @@ SELECT * FROM test1 ORDER BY a || b COLLATE "fr_FR";
name such as <literal>de_DE</literal> can be considered unique
within a given database even though it would not be unique globally.
Use of the stripped collation names is recommended, since it will
- make one less thing you need to change if you decide to change to
+ make one fewer thing you need to change if you decide to change to
another database encoding. Note however that the <literal>default</literal>,
<literal>C</literal>, and <literal>POSIX</literal> collations can be used regardless of
the database encoding.
diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml
index 0b24a55505..693423e524 100644
--- a/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml
+++ b/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml
@@ -867,7 +867,7 @@ CREATE TYPE <replaceable class="parameter">name</replaceable>
Before <productname>PostgreSQL</productname> version 8.3, the name of
a generated array type was always exactly the element type's name with one
underscore character (<literal>_</literal>) prepended. (Type names were
- therefore restricted in length to one less character than other names.)
+ therefore restricted in length to one fewer character than other names.)
While this is still usually the case, the array type name may vary from
this in case of maximum-length names or collisions with user type names
that begin with underscore. Writing code that depends on this convention
diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml
index e81addcfa9..aa172d102b 100644
--- a/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml
+++ b/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml
@@ -1266,7 +1266,7 @@ CREATE [ OR REPLACE ] RULE <replaceable class="parameter">name</replaceable> AS
<para>
The query trees generated from rule actions are thrown into the
rewrite system again, and maybe more rules get applied resulting
- in more or less query trees.
+ in additional or fewer query trees.
So a rule's actions must have either a different
command type or a different result relation than the rule itself is
on, otherwise this recursive process will end up in an infinite loop.
diff --git a/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c b/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c
index 24a27e387d..0b56b0fa5a 100644
--- a/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c
+++ b/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c
@@ -719,11 +719,11 @@ heap_copytuple_with_tuple(HeapTuple src, HeapTuple dest)
}
/*
- * Expand a tuple which has less attributes than required. For each attribute
+ * Expand a tuple which has fewer attributes than required. For each attribute
* not present in the sourceTuple, if there is a missing value that will be
* used. Otherwise the attribute will be set to NULL.
*
- * The source tuple must have less attributes than the required number.
+ * The source tuple must have fewer attributes than the required number.
*
* Only one of targetHeapTuple and targetMinimalTuple may be supplied. The
* other argument must be NULL.
diff --git a/src/backend/commands/analyze.c b/src/backend/commands/analyze.c
index 7295cf0215..64908ac39c 100644
--- a/src/backend/commands/analyze.c
+++ b/src/backend/commands/analyze.c
@@ -1003,7 +1003,7 @@ examine_attribute(Relation onerel, int attnum, Node *index_expr)
* As of May 2004 we use a new two-stage method: Stage one selects up
* to targrows random blocks (or all blocks, if there aren't so many).
* Stage two scans these blocks and uses the Vitter algorithm to create
- * a random sample of targrows rows (or less, if there are less in the
+ * a random sample of targrows rows (or fewer, if there are fewer in the
* sample of blocks). The two stages are executed simultaneously: each
* block is processed as soon as stage one returns its number and while
* the rows are read stage two controls which ones are to be inserted
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c b/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c
index 4d185c27b4..078aaef539 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c
@@ -263,7 +263,7 @@ static int compareDatetime(Datum val1, Oid typid1, Datum val2, Oid typid2,
* implement @? and @@ operators, which in turn are intended to have an
* index support. Thus, it's desirable to make it easier to achieve
* consistency between index scan results and sequential scan results.
- * So, we throw as less errors as possible. Regarding this function,
+ * So, we throw as few errors as possible. Regarding this function,
* such behavior also matches behavior of JSON_EXISTS() clause of
* SQL/JSON. Regarding jsonb_path_match(), this function doesn't have
* an analogy in SQL/JSON, so we define its behavior on our own.
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c b/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c
index 47ca4ddbb5..52314d3aa1 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c
@@ -645,7 +645,7 @@ scalarineqsel(PlannerInfo *root, Oid operator, bool isgt, bool iseq,
/*
* The calculation so far gave us a selectivity for the "<=" case.
- * We'll have one less tuple for "<" and one additional tuple for
+ * We'll have one fewer tuple for "<" and one additional tuple for
* ">=", the latter of which we'll reverse the selectivity for
* below, so we can simply subtract one tuple for both cases. The
* cases that need this adjustment can be identified by iseq being
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c b/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c
index fa2b49c676..55c9445898 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c
@@ -1497,7 +1497,7 @@ GetCatCacheHashValue(CatCache *cache,
* It doesn't make any sense to specify all of the cache's key columns
* here: since the key is unique, there could be at most one match, so
* you ought to use SearchCatCache() instead. Hence this function takes
- * one less Datum argument than SearchCatCache() does.
+ * one fewer Datum argument than SearchCatCache() does.
*
* The caller must not modify the list object or the pointed-to tuples,
* and must call ReleaseCatCacheList() when done with the list.
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c b/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c
index 0c327e823f..7348b86682 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c
@@ -42,7 +42,7 @@ BlockSampler_Init(BlockSampler bs, BlockNumber nblocks, int samplesize,
bs->N = nblocks; /* measured table size */
/*
- * If we decide to reduce samplesize for tables that have less or not much
+ * If we decide to reduce samplesize for tables that have fewer or not much
* more than samplesize blocks, here is the place to do it.
*/
bs->n = samplesize;
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c b/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c
index e4ee1aab97..10a1effb74 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c
@@ -495,7 +495,7 @@ FreePageManagerDump(FreePageManager *fpm)
* if we search the parent page for the first key greater than or equal to
* the first key on the current page, the downlink to this page will be either
* the exact index returned by the search (if the first key decreased)
- * or one less (if the first key increased).
+ * or one fewer (if the first key increased).
*/
static void
FreePageBtreeAdjustAncestorKeys(FreePageManager *fpm, FreePageBtree *btp)
diff --git a/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c b/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c
index a4a3f40048..627a244fb7 100644
--- a/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c
+++ b/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c
@@ -6458,7 +6458,7 @@ threadRun(void *arg)
/*
* If advanceConnectionState changed client to finished state,
- * that's one less client that remains.
+ * that's one fewer client that remains.
*/
if (st->state == CSTATE_FINISHED || st->state == CSTATE_ABORTED)
remains--;
diff --git a/src/include/pg_config_manual.h b/src/include/pg_config_manual.h
index d27c8601fa..e3d2e751ea 100644
--- a/src/include/pg_config_manual.h
+++ b/src/include/pg_config_manual.h
@@ -21,7 +21,7 @@
/*
* Maximum length for identifiers (e.g. table names, column names,
- * function names). Names actually are limited to one less byte than this,
+ * function names). Names actually are limited to one fewer byte than this,
* because the length must include a trailing zero byte.
*
* Changing this requires an initdb.
@@ -87,7 +87,7 @@
/*
* MAXPGPATH: standard size of a pathname buffer in PostgreSQL (hence,
- * maximum usable pathname length is one less).
+ * maximum usable pathname length is one fewer).
*
* We'd use a standard system header symbol for this, if there weren't
* so many to choose from: MAXPATHLEN, MAX_PATH, PATH_MAX are all
diff --git a/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h b/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h
index 67d3c7b4e4..9e73f1f1b1 100644
--- a/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h
+++ b/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h
@@ -7,7 +7,7 @@
/*
* Maximum length for identifiers (e.g. table names, column names,
- * function names). Names actually are limited to one less byte than this,
+ * function names). Names actually are limited to one fewer byte than this,
* because the length must include a trailing zero byte.
*
* This should be at least as much as NAMEDATALEN of the database the
diff --git a/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out b/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out
index 84f7eabb66..9799cfbdbd 100644
--- a/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out
+++ b/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out
@@ -4325,7 +4325,7 @@ SELECT f1, polygon(8, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
<(100,1),115> | ((-15,1),(18.6827201635,82.3172798365),(100,116),(181.317279836,82.3172798365),(215,1),(181.317279836,-80.3172798365),(100,-114),(18.6827201635,-80.3172798365))
(6 rows)
--- Too less points error
+-- Too few points error
SELECT f1, polygon(1, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
ERROR: must request at least 2 points
-- Zero radius error
diff --git a/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql b/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql
index 96df0ab05a..b0ab6d03ec 100644
--- a/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql
+++ b/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql
@@ -424,7 +424,7 @@ SELECT f1, f1::polygon FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
-- To polygon with less points
SELECT f1, polygon(8, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
--- Too less points error
+-- Too few points error
SELECT f1, polygon(1, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
-- Zero radius error
--
2.17.0
--lc9FT7cWel8HagAv
Content-Type: text/x-diff; charset=us-ascii
Content-Disposition: attachment;
filename="0007-function-comment-get_am_name.patch"
^ permalink raw reply [nested|flat] 25+ messages in thread
* [PATCH 06/18] One fewer (not one less)
@ 2021-01-18 20:37 Justin Pryzby <[email protected]>
0 siblings, 0 replies; 25+ messages in thread
From: Justin Pryzby @ 2021-01-18 20:37 UTC (permalink / raw)
---
contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c | 2 +-
doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml | 2 +-
doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml | 2 +-
doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml | 2 +-
src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c | 4 ++--
src/backend/commands/analyze.c | 2 +-
src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c | 2 +-
src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c | 2 +-
src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c | 2 +-
src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c | 2 +-
src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c | 2 +-
src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c | 2 +-
src/include/pg_config_manual.h | 4 ++--
src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h | 2 +-
src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out | 2 +-
src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql | 2 +-
16 files changed, 18 insertions(+), 18 deletions(-)
diff --git a/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c b/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c
index 9abcee32af..f6760eb31e 100644
--- a/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c
+++ b/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c
@@ -338,7 +338,7 @@ tuple_data_split_internal(Oid relid, char *tupdata,
attr = TupleDescAttr(tupdesc, i);
/*
- * Tuple header can specify less attributes than tuple descriptor as
+ * Tuple header can specify fewer attributes than tuple descriptor as
* ALTER TABLE ADD COLUMN without DEFAULT keyword does not actually
* change tuples in pages, so attributes with numbers greater than
* (t_infomask2 & HEAP_NATTS_MASK) should be treated as NULL.
diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml
index cebc09ef91..1b00e543a6 100644
--- a/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml
+++ b/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml
@@ -619,7 +619,7 @@ SELECT * FROM test1 ORDER BY a || b COLLATE "fr_FR";
name such as <literal>de_DE</literal> can be considered unique
within a given database even though it would not be unique globally.
Use of the stripped collation names is recommended, since it will
- make one less thing you need to change if you decide to change to
+ make one fewer thing you need to change if you decide to change to
another database encoding. Note however that the <literal>default</literal>,
<literal>C</literal>, and <literal>POSIX</literal> collations can be used regardless of
the database encoding.
diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml
index 0b24a55505..693423e524 100644
--- a/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml
+++ b/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml
@@ -867,7 +867,7 @@ CREATE TYPE <replaceable class="parameter">name</replaceable>
Before <productname>PostgreSQL</productname> version 8.3, the name of
a generated array type was always exactly the element type's name with one
underscore character (<literal>_</literal>) prepended. (Type names were
- therefore restricted in length to one less character than other names.)
+ therefore restricted in length to one fewer character than other names.)
While this is still usually the case, the array type name may vary from
this in case of maximum-length names or collisions with user type names
that begin with underscore. Writing code that depends on this convention
diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml
index e81addcfa9..aa172d102b 100644
--- a/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml
+++ b/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml
@@ -1266,7 +1266,7 @@ CREATE [ OR REPLACE ] RULE <replaceable class="parameter">name</replaceable> AS
<para>
The query trees generated from rule actions are thrown into the
rewrite system again, and maybe more rules get applied resulting
- in more or less query trees.
+ in additional or fewer query trees.
So a rule's actions must have either a different
command type or a different result relation than the rule itself is
on, otherwise this recursive process will end up in an infinite loop.
diff --git a/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c b/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c
index 24a27e387d..0b56b0fa5a 100644
--- a/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c
+++ b/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c
@@ -719,11 +719,11 @@ heap_copytuple_with_tuple(HeapTuple src, HeapTuple dest)
}
/*
- * Expand a tuple which has less attributes than required. For each attribute
+ * Expand a tuple which has fewer attributes than required. For each attribute
* not present in the sourceTuple, if there is a missing value that will be
* used. Otherwise the attribute will be set to NULL.
*
- * The source tuple must have less attributes than the required number.
+ * The source tuple must have fewer attributes than the required number.
*
* Only one of targetHeapTuple and targetMinimalTuple may be supplied. The
* other argument must be NULL.
diff --git a/src/backend/commands/analyze.c b/src/backend/commands/analyze.c
index 7295cf0215..64908ac39c 100644
--- a/src/backend/commands/analyze.c
+++ b/src/backend/commands/analyze.c
@@ -1003,7 +1003,7 @@ examine_attribute(Relation onerel, int attnum, Node *index_expr)
* As of May 2004 we use a new two-stage method: Stage one selects up
* to targrows random blocks (or all blocks, if there aren't so many).
* Stage two scans these blocks and uses the Vitter algorithm to create
- * a random sample of targrows rows (or less, if there are less in the
+ * a random sample of targrows rows (or fewer, if there are fewer in the
* sample of blocks). The two stages are executed simultaneously: each
* block is processed as soon as stage one returns its number and while
* the rows are read stage two controls which ones are to be inserted
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c b/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c
index 4d185c27b4..078aaef539 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c
@@ -263,7 +263,7 @@ static int compareDatetime(Datum val1, Oid typid1, Datum val2, Oid typid2,
* implement @? and @@ operators, which in turn are intended to have an
* index support. Thus, it's desirable to make it easier to achieve
* consistency between index scan results and sequential scan results.
- * So, we throw as less errors as possible. Regarding this function,
+ * So, we throw as few errors as possible. Regarding this function,
* such behavior also matches behavior of JSON_EXISTS() clause of
* SQL/JSON. Regarding jsonb_path_match(), this function doesn't have
* an analogy in SQL/JSON, so we define its behavior on our own.
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c b/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c
index 47ca4ddbb5..52314d3aa1 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c
@@ -645,7 +645,7 @@ scalarineqsel(PlannerInfo *root, Oid operator, bool isgt, bool iseq,
/*
* The calculation so far gave us a selectivity for the "<=" case.
- * We'll have one less tuple for "<" and one additional tuple for
+ * We'll have one fewer tuple for "<" and one additional tuple for
* ">=", the latter of which we'll reverse the selectivity for
* below, so we can simply subtract one tuple for both cases. The
* cases that need this adjustment can be identified by iseq being
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c b/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c
index fa2b49c676..55c9445898 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c
@@ -1497,7 +1497,7 @@ GetCatCacheHashValue(CatCache *cache,
* It doesn't make any sense to specify all of the cache's key columns
* here: since the key is unique, there could be at most one match, so
* you ought to use SearchCatCache() instead. Hence this function takes
- * one less Datum argument than SearchCatCache() does.
+ * one fewer Datum argument than SearchCatCache() does.
*
* The caller must not modify the list object or the pointed-to tuples,
* and must call ReleaseCatCacheList() when done with the list.
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c b/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c
index 0c327e823f..7348b86682 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c
@@ -42,7 +42,7 @@ BlockSampler_Init(BlockSampler bs, BlockNumber nblocks, int samplesize,
bs->N = nblocks; /* measured table size */
/*
- * If we decide to reduce samplesize for tables that have less or not much
+ * If we decide to reduce samplesize for tables that have fewer or not much
* more than samplesize blocks, here is the place to do it.
*/
bs->n = samplesize;
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c b/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c
index e4ee1aab97..10a1effb74 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c
@@ -495,7 +495,7 @@ FreePageManagerDump(FreePageManager *fpm)
* if we search the parent page for the first key greater than or equal to
* the first key on the current page, the downlink to this page will be either
* the exact index returned by the search (if the first key decreased)
- * or one less (if the first key increased).
+ * or one fewer (if the first key increased).
*/
static void
FreePageBtreeAdjustAncestorKeys(FreePageManager *fpm, FreePageBtree *btp)
diff --git a/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c b/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c
index a4a3f40048..627a244fb7 100644
--- a/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c
+++ b/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c
@@ -6458,7 +6458,7 @@ threadRun(void *arg)
/*
* If advanceConnectionState changed client to finished state,
- * that's one less client that remains.
+ * that's one fewer client that remains.
*/
if (st->state == CSTATE_FINISHED || st->state == CSTATE_ABORTED)
remains--;
diff --git a/src/include/pg_config_manual.h b/src/include/pg_config_manual.h
index d27c8601fa..e3d2e751ea 100644
--- a/src/include/pg_config_manual.h
+++ b/src/include/pg_config_manual.h
@@ -21,7 +21,7 @@
/*
* Maximum length for identifiers (e.g. table names, column names,
- * function names). Names actually are limited to one less byte than this,
+ * function names). Names actually are limited to one fewer byte than this,
* because the length must include a trailing zero byte.
*
* Changing this requires an initdb.
@@ -87,7 +87,7 @@
/*
* MAXPGPATH: standard size of a pathname buffer in PostgreSQL (hence,
- * maximum usable pathname length is one less).
+ * maximum usable pathname length is one fewer).
*
* We'd use a standard system header symbol for this, if there weren't
* so many to choose from: MAXPATHLEN, MAX_PATH, PATH_MAX are all
diff --git a/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h b/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h
index 67d3c7b4e4..9e73f1f1b1 100644
--- a/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h
+++ b/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h
@@ -7,7 +7,7 @@
/*
* Maximum length for identifiers (e.g. table names, column names,
- * function names). Names actually are limited to one less byte than this,
+ * function names). Names actually are limited to one fewer byte than this,
* because the length must include a trailing zero byte.
*
* This should be at least as much as NAMEDATALEN of the database the
diff --git a/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out b/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out
index 84f7eabb66..9799cfbdbd 100644
--- a/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out
+++ b/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out
@@ -4325,7 +4325,7 @@ SELECT f1, polygon(8, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
<(100,1),115> | ((-15,1),(18.6827201635,82.3172798365),(100,116),(181.317279836,82.3172798365),(215,1),(181.317279836,-80.3172798365),(100,-114),(18.6827201635,-80.3172798365))
(6 rows)
--- Too less points error
+-- Too few points error
SELECT f1, polygon(1, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
ERROR: must request at least 2 points
-- Zero radius error
diff --git a/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql b/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql
index 96df0ab05a..b0ab6d03ec 100644
--- a/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql
+++ b/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql
@@ -424,7 +424,7 @@ SELECT f1, f1::polygon FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
-- To polygon with less points
SELECT f1, polygon(8, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
--- Too less points error
+-- Too few points error
SELECT f1, polygon(1, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
-- Zero radius error
--
2.17.0
--lc9FT7cWel8HagAv
Content-Type: text/x-diff; charset=us-ascii
Content-Disposition: attachment;
filename="0007-function-comment-get_am_name.patch"
^ permalink raw reply [nested|flat] 25+ messages in thread
* [PATCH 06/18] One fewer (not one less)
@ 2021-01-18 20:37 Justin Pryzby <[email protected]>
0 siblings, 0 replies; 25+ messages in thread
From: Justin Pryzby @ 2021-01-18 20:37 UTC (permalink / raw)
---
contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c | 2 +-
doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml | 2 +-
doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml | 2 +-
doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml | 2 +-
src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c | 4 ++--
src/backend/commands/analyze.c | 2 +-
src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c | 2 +-
src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c | 2 +-
src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c | 2 +-
src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c | 2 +-
src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c | 2 +-
src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c | 2 +-
src/include/pg_config_manual.h | 4 ++--
src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h | 2 +-
src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out | 2 +-
src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql | 2 +-
16 files changed, 18 insertions(+), 18 deletions(-)
diff --git a/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c b/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c
index 9abcee32af..f6760eb31e 100644
--- a/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c
+++ b/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c
@@ -338,7 +338,7 @@ tuple_data_split_internal(Oid relid, char *tupdata,
attr = TupleDescAttr(tupdesc, i);
/*
- * Tuple header can specify less attributes than tuple descriptor as
+ * Tuple header can specify fewer attributes than tuple descriptor as
* ALTER TABLE ADD COLUMN without DEFAULT keyword does not actually
* change tuples in pages, so attributes with numbers greater than
* (t_infomask2 & HEAP_NATTS_MASK) should be treated as NULL.
diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml
index cebc09ef91..1b00e543a6 100644
--- a/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml
+++ b/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml
@@ -619,7 +619,7 @@ SELECT * FROM test1 ORDER BY a || b COLLATE "fr_FR";
name such as <literal>de_DE</literal> can be considered unique
within a given database even though it would not be unique globally.
Use of the stripped collation names is recommended, since it will
- make one less thing you need to change if you decide to change to
+ make one fewer thing you need to change if you decide to change to
another database encoding. Note however that the <literal>default</literal>,
<literal>C</literal>, and <literal>POSIX</literal> collations can be used regardless of
the database encoding.
diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml
index 0b24a55505..693423e524 100644
--- a/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml
+++ b/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml
@@ -867,7 +867,7 @@ CREATE TYPE <replaceable class="parameter">name</replaceable>
Before <productname>PostgreSQL</productname> version 8.3, the name of
a generated array type was always exactly the element type's name with one
underscore character (<literal>_</literal>) prepended. (Type names were
- therefore restricted in length to one less character than other names.)
+ therefore restricted in length to one fewer character than other names.)
While this is still usually the case, the array type name may vary from
this in case of maximum-length names or collisions with user type names
that begin with underscore. Writing code that depends on this convention
diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml
index e81addcfa9..aa172d102b 100644
--- a/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml
+++ b/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml
@@ -1266,7 +1266,7 @@ CREATE [ OR REPLACE ] RULE <replaceable class="parameter">name</replaceable> AS
<para>
The query trees generated from rule actions are thrown into the
rewrite system again, and maybe more rules get applied resulting
- in more or less query trees.
+ in additional or fewer query trees.
So a rule's actions must have either a different
command type or a different result relation than the rule itself is
on, otherwise this recursive process will end up in an infinite loop.
diff --git a/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c b/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c
index 24a27e387d..0b56b0fa5a 100644
--- a/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c
+++ b/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c
@@ -719,11 +719,11 @@ heap_copytuple_with_tuple(HeapTuple src, HeapTuple dest)
}
/*
- * Expand a tuple which has less attributes than required. For each attribute
+ * Expand a tuple which has fewer attributes than required. For each attribute
* not present in the sourceTuple, if there is a missing value that will be
* used. Otherwise the attribute will be set to NULL.
*
- * The source tuple must have less attributes than the required number.
+ * The source tuple must have fewer attributes than the required number.
*
* Only one of targetHeapTuple and targetMinimalTuple may be supplied. The
* other argument must be NULL.
diff --git a/src/backend/commands/analyze.c b/src/backend/commands/analyze.c
index 7295cf0215..64908ac39c 100644
--- a/src/backend/commands/analyze.c
+++ b/src/backend/commands/analyze.c
@@ -1003,7 +1003,7 @@ examine_attribute(Relation onerel, int attnum, Node *index_expr)
* As of May 2004 we use a new two-stage method: Stage one selects up
* to targrows random blocks (or all blocks, if there aren't so many).
* Stage two scans these blocks and uses the Vitter algorithm to create
- * a random sample of targrows rows (or less, if there are less in the
+ * a random sample of targrows rows (or fewer, if there are fewer in the
* sample of blocks). The two stages are executed simultaneously: each
* block is processed as soon as stage one returns its number and while
* the rows are read stage two controls which ones are to be inserted
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c b/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c
index 4d185c27b4..078aaef539 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c
@@ -263,7 +263,7 @@ static int compareDatetime(Datum val1, Oid typid1, Datum val2, Oid typid2,
* implement @? and @@ operators, which in turn are intended to have an
* index support. Thus, it's desirable to make it easier to achieve
* consistency between index scan results and sequential scan results.
- * So, we throw as less errors as possible. Regarding this function,
+ * So, we throw as few errors as possible. Regarding this function,
* such behavior also matches behavior of JSON_EXISTS() clause of
* SQL/JSON. Regarding jsonb_path_match(), this function doesn't have
* an analogy in SQL/JSON, so we define its behavior on our own.
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c b/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c
index 47ca4ddbb5..52314d3aa1 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c
@@ -645,7 +645,7 @@ scalarineqsel(PlannerInfo *root, Oid operator, bool isgt, bool iseq,
/*
* The calculation so far gave us a selectivity for the "<=" case.
- * We'll have one less tuple for "<" and one additional tuple for
+ * We'll have one fewer tuple for "<" and one additional tuple for
* ">=", the latter of which we'll reverse the selectivity for
* below, so we can simply subtract one tuple for both cases. The
* cases that need this adjustment can be identified by iseq being
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c b/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c
index fa2b49c676..55c9445898 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c
@@ -1497,7 +1497,7 @@ GetCatCacheHashValue(CatCache *cache,
* It doesn't make any sense to specify all of the cache's key columns
* here: since the key is unique, there could be at most one match, so
* you ought to use SearchCatCache() instead. Hence this function takes
- * one less Datum argument than SearchCatCache() does.
+ * one fewer Datum argument than SearchCatCache() does.
*
* The caller must not modify the list object or the pointed-to tuples,
* and must call ReleaseCatCacheList() when done with the list.
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c b/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c
index 0c327e823f..7348b86682 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c
@@ -42,7 +42,7 @@ BlockSampler_Init(BlockSampler bs, BlockNumber nblocks, int samplesize,
bs->N = nblocks; /* measured table size */
/*
- * If we decide to reduce samplesize for tables that have less or not much
+ * If we decide to reduce samplesize for tables that have fewer or not much
* more than samplesize blocks, here is the place to do it.
*/
bs->n = samplesize;
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c b/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c
index e4ee1aab97..10a1effb74 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c
@@ -495,7 +495,7 @@ FreePageManagerDump(FreePageManager *fpm)
* if we search the parent page for the first key greater than or equal to
* the first key on the current page, the downlink to this page will be either
* the exact index returned by the search (if the first key decreased)
- * or one less (if the first key increased).
+ * or one fewer (if the first key increased).
*/
static void
FreePageBtreeAdjustAncestorKeys(FreePageManager *fpm, FreePageBtree *btp)
diff --git a/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c b/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c
index a4a3f40048..627a244fb7 100644
--- a/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c
+++ b/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c
@@ -6458,7 +6458,7 @@ threadRun(void *arg)
/*
* If advanceConnectionState changed client to finished state,
- * that's one less client that remains.
+ * that's one fewer client that remains.
*/
if (st->state == CSTATE_FINISHED || st->state == CSTATE_ABORTED)
remains--;
diff --git a/src/include/pg_config_manual.h b/src/include/pg_config_manual.h
index d27c8601fa..e3d2e751ea 100644
--- a/src/include/pg_config_manual.h
+++ b/src/include/pg_config_manual.h
@@ -21,7 +21,7 @@
/*
* Maximum length for identifiers (e.g. table names, column names,
- * function names). Names actually are limited to one less byte than this,
+ * function names). Names actually are limited to one fewer byte than this,
* because the length must include a trailing zero byte.
*
* Changing this requires an initdb.
@@ -87,7 +87,7 @@
/*
* MAXPGPATH: standard size of a pathname buffer in PostgreSQL (hence,
- * maximum usable pathname length is one less).
+ * maximum usable pathname length is one fewer).
*
* We'd use a standard system header symbol for this, if there weren't
* so many to choose from: MAXPATHLEN, MAX_PATH, PATH_MAX are all
diff --git a/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h b/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h
index 67d3c7b4e4..9e73f1f1b1 100644
--- a/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h
+++ b/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h
@@ -7,7 +7,7 @@
/*
* Maximum length for identifiers (e.g. table names, column names,
- * function names). Names actually are limited to one less byte than this,
+ * function names). Names actually are limited to one fewer byte than this,
* because the length must include a trailing zero byte.
*
* This should be at least as much as NAMEDATALEN of the database the
diff --git a/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out b/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out
index 84f7eabb66..9799cfbdbd 100644
--- a/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out
+++ b/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out
@@ -4325,7 +4325,7 @@ SELECT f1, polygon(8, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
<(100,1),115> | ((-15,1),(18.6827201635,82.3172798365),(100,116),(181.317279836,82.3172798365),(215,1),(181.317279836,-80.3172798365),(100,-114),(18.6827201635,-80.3172798365))
(6 rows)
--- Too less points error
+-- Too few points error
SELECT f1, polygon(1, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
ERROR: must request at least 2 points
-- Zero radius error
diff --git a/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql b/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql
index 96df0ab05a..b0ab6d03ec 100644
--- a/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql
+++ b/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql
@@ -424,7 +424,7 @@ SELECT f1, f1::polygon FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
-- To polygon with less points
SELECT f1, polygon(8, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
--- Too less points error
+-- Too few points error
SELECT f1, polygon(1, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
-- Zero radius error
--
2.17.0
--lc9FT7cWel8HagAv
Content-Type: text/x-diff; charset=us-ascii
Content-Disposition: attachment;
filename="0007-function-comment-get_am_name.patch"
^ permalink raw reply [nested|flat] 25+ messages in thread
* [PATCH 06/18] One fewer (not one less)
@ 2021-01-18 20:37 Justin Pryzby <[email protected]>
0 siblings, 0 replies; 25+ messages in thread
From: Justin Pryzby @ 2021-01-18 20:37 UTC (permalink / raw)
---
contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c | 2 +-
doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml | 2 +-
doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml | 2 +-
doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml | 2 +-
src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c | 4 ++--
src/backend/commands/analyze.c | 2 +-
src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c | 2 +-
src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c | 2 +-
src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c | 2 +-
src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c | 2 +-
src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c | 2 +-
src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c | 2 +-
src/include/pg_config_manual.h | 4 ++--
src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h | 2 +-
src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out | 2 +-
src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql | 2 +-
16 files changed, 18 insertions(+), 18 deletions(-)
diff --git a/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c b/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c
index 9abcee32af..f6760eb31e 100644
--- a/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c
+++ b/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c
@@ -338,7 +338,7 @@ tuple_data_split_internal(Oid relid, char *tupdata,
attr = TupleDescAttr(tupdesc, i);
/*
- * Tuple header can specify less attributes than tuple descriptor as
+ * Tuple header can specify fewer attributes than tuple descriptor as
* ALTER TABLE ADD COLUMN without DEFAULT keyword does not actually
* change tuples in pages, so attributes with numbers greater than
* (t_infomask2 & HEAP_NATTS_MASK) should be treated as NULL.
diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml
index cebc09ef91..1b00e543a6 100644
--- a/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml
+++ b/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml
@@ -619,7 +619,7 @@ SELECT * FROM test1 ORDER BY a || b COLLATE "fr_FR";
name such as <literal>de_DE</literal> can be considered unique
within a given database even though it would not be unique globally.
Use of the stripped collation names is recommended, since it will
- make one less thing you need to change if you decide to change to
+ make one fewer thing you need to change if you decide to change to
another database encoding. Note however that the <literal>default</literal>,
<literal>C</literal>, and <literal>POSIX</literal> collations can be used regardless of
the database encoding.
diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml
index 0b24a55505..693423e524 100644
--- a/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml
+++ b/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml
@@ -867,7 +867,7 @@ CREATE TYPE <replaceable class="parameter">name</replaceable>
Before <productname>PostgreSQL</productname> version 8.3, the name of
a generated array type was always exactly the element type's name with one
underscore character (<literal>_</literal>) prepended. (Type names were
- therefore restricted in length to one less character than other names.)
+ therefore restricted in length to one fewer character than other names.)
While this is still usually the case, the array type name may vary from
this in case of maximum-length names or collisions with user type names
that begin with underscore. Writing code that depends on this convention
diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml
index e81addcfa9..aa172d102b 100644
--- a/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml
+++ b/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml
@@ -1266,7 +1266,7 @@ CREATE [ OR REPLACE ] RULE <replaceable class="parameter">name</replaceable> AS
<para>
The query trees generated from rule actions are thrown into the
rewrite system again, and maybe more rules get applied resulting
- in more or less query trees.
+ in additional or fewer query trees.
So a rule's actions must have either a different
command type or a different result relation than the rule itself is
on, otherwise this recursive process will end up in an infinite loop.
diff --git a/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c b/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c
index 24a27e387d..0b56b0fa5a 100644
--- a/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c
+++ b/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c
@@ -719,11 +719,11 @@ heap_copytuple_with_tuple(HeapTuple src, HeapTuple dest)
}
/*
- * Expand a tuple which has less attributes than required. For each attribute
+ * Expand a tuple which has fewer attributes than required. For each attribute
* not present in the sourceTuple, if there is a missing value that will be
* used. Otherwise the attribute will be set to NULL.
*
- * The source tuple must have less attributes than the required number.
+ * The source tuple must have fewer attributes than the required number.
*
* Only one of targetHeapTuple and targetMinimalTuple may be supplied. The
* other argument must be NULL.
diff --git a/src/backend/commands/analyze.c b/src/backend/commands/analyze.c
index 7295cf0215..64908ac39c 100644
--- a/src/backend/commands/analyze.c
+++ b/src/backend/commands/analyze.c
@@ -1003,7 +1003,7 @@ examine_attribute(Relation onerel, int attnum, Node *index_expr)
* As of May 2004 we use a new two-stage method: Stage one selects up
* to targrows random blocks (or all blocks, if there aren't so many).
* Stage two scans these blocks and uses the Vitter algorithm to create
- * a random sample of targrows rows (or less, if there are less in the
+ * a random sample of targrows rows (or fewer, if there are fewer in the
* sample of blocks). The two stages are executed simultaneously: each
* block is processed as soon as stage one returns its number and while
* the rows are read stage two controls which ones are to be inserted
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c b/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c
index 4d185c27b4..078aaef539 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c
@@ -263,7 +263,7 @@ static int compareDatetime(Datum val1, Oid typid1, Datum val2, Oid typid2,
* implement @? and @@ operators, which in turn are intended to have an
* index support. Thus, it's desirable to make it easier to achieve
* consistency between index scan results and sequential scan results.
- * So, we throw as less errors as possible. Regarding this function,
+ * So, we throw as few errors as possible. Regarding this function,
* such behavior also matches behavior of JSON_EXISTS() clause of
* SQL/JSON. Regarding jsonb_path_match(), this function doesn't have
* an analogy in SQL/JSON, so we define its behavior on our own.
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c b/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c
index 47ca4ddbb5..52314d3aa1 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c
@@ -645,7 +645,7 @@ scalarineqsel(PlannerInfo *root, Oid operator, bool isgt, bool iseq,
/*
* The calculation so far gave us a selectivity for the "<=" case.
- * We'll have one less tuple for "<" and one additional tuple for
+ * We'll have one fewer tuple for "<" and one additional tuple for
* ">=", the latter of which we'll reverse the selectivity for
* below, so we can simply subtract one tuple for both cases. The
* cases that need this adjustment can be identified by iseq being
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c b/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c
index fa2b49c676..55c9445898 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c
@@ -1497,7 +1497,7 @@ GetCatCacheHashValue(CatCache *cache,
* It doesn't make any sense to specify all of the cache's key columns
* here: since the key is unique, there could be at most one match, so
* you ought to use SearchCatCache() instead. Hence this function takes
- * one less Datum argument than SearchCatCache() does.
+ * one fewer Datum argument than SearchCatCache() does.
*
* The caller must not modify the list object or the pointed-to tuples,
* and must call ReleaseCatCacheList() when done with the list.
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c b/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c
index 0c327e823f..7348b86682 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c
@@ -42,7 +42,7 @@ BlockSampler_Init(BlockSampler bs, BlockNumber nblocks, int samplesize,
bs->N = nblocks; /* measured table size */
/*
- * If we decide to reduce samplesize for tables that have less or not much
+ * If we decide to reduce samplesize for tables that have fewer or not much
* more than samplesize blocks, here is the place to do it.
*/
bs->n = samplesize;
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c b/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c
index e4ee1aab97..10a1effb74 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c
@@ -495,7 +495,7 @@ FreePageManagerDump(FreePageManager *fpm)
* if we search the parent page for the first key greater than or equal to
* the first key on the current page, the downlink to this page will be either
* the exact index returned by the search (if the first key decreased)
- * or one less (if the first key increased).
+ * or one fewer (if the first key increased).
*/
static void
FreePageBtreeAdjustAncestorKeys(FreePageManager *fpm, FreePageBtree *btp)
diff --git a/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c b/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c
index a4a3f40048..627a244fb7 100644
--- a/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c
+++ b/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c
@@ -6458,7 +6458,7 @@ threadRun(void *arg)
/*
* If advanceConnectionState changed client to finished state,
- * that's one less client that remains.
+ * that's one fewer client that remains.
*/
if (st->state == CSTATE_FINISHED || st->state == CSTATE_ABORTED)
remains--;
diff --git a/src/include/pg_config_manual.h b/src/include/pg_config_manual.h
index d27c8601fa..e3d2e751ea 100644
--- a/src/include/pg_config_manual.h
+++ b/src/include/pg_config_manual.h
@@ -21,7 +21,7 @@
/*
* Maximum length for identifiers (e.g. table names, column names,
- * function names). Names actually are limited to one less byte than this,
+ * function names). Names actually are limited to one fewer byte than this,
* because the length must include a trailing zero byte.
*
* Changing this requires an initdb.
@@ -87,7 +87,7 @@
/*
* MAXPGPATH: standard size of a pathname buffer in PostgreSQL (hence,
- * maximum usable pathname length is one less).
+ * maximum usable pathname length is one fewer).
*
* We'd use a standard system header symbol for this, if there weren't
* so many to choose from: MAXPATHLEN, MAX_PATH, PATH_MAX are all
diff --git a/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h b/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h
index 67d3c7b4e4..9e73f1f1b1 100644
--- a/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h
+++ b/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h
@@ -7,7 +7,7 @@
/*
* Maximum length for identifiers (e.g. table names, column names,
- * function names). Names actually are limited to one less byte than this,
+ * function names). Names actually are limited to one fewer byte than this,
* because the length must include a trailing zero byte.
*
* This should be at least as much as NAMEDATALEN of the database the
diff --git a/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out b/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out
index 84f7eabb66..9799cfbdbd 100644
--- a/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out
+++ b/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out
@@ -4325,7 +4325,7 @@ SELECT f1, polygon(8, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
<(100,1),115> | ((-15,1),(18.6827201635,82.3172798365),(100,116),(181.317279836,82.3172798365),(215,1),(181.317279836,-80.3172798365),(100,-114),(18.6827201635,-80.3172798365))
(6 rows)
--- Too less points error
+-- Too few points error
SELECT f1, polygon(1, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
ERROR: must request at least 2 points
-- Zero radius error
diff --git a/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql b/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql
index 96df0ab05a..b0ab6d03ec 100644
--- a/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql
+++ b/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql
@@ -424,7 +424,7 @@ SELECT f1, f1::polygon FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
-- To polygon with less points
SELECT f1, polygon(8, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
--- Too less points error
+-- Too few points error
SELECT f1, polygon(1, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
-- Zero radius error
--
2.17.0
--lc9FT7cWel8HagAv
Content-Type: text/x-diff; charset=us-ascii
Content-Disposition: attachment;
filename="0007-function-comment-get_am_name.patch"
^ permalink raw reply [nested|flat] 25+ messages in thread
* [PATCH 06/18] One fewer (not one less)
@ 2021-01-18 20:37 Justin Pryzby <[email protected]>
0 siblings, 0 replies; 25+ messages in thread
From: Justin Pryzby @ 2021-01-18 20:37 UTC (permalink / raw)
---
contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c | 2 +-
doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml | 2 +-
doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml | 2 +-
doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml | 2 +-
src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c | 4 ++--
src/backend/commands/analyze.c | 2 +-
src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c | 2 +-
src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c | 2 +-
src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c | 2 +-
src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c | 2 +-
src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c | 2 +-
src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c | 2 +-
src/include/pg_config_manual.h | 4 ++--
src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h | 2 +-
src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out | 2 +-
src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql | 2 +-
16 files changed, 18 insertions(+), 18 deletions(-)
diff --git a/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c b/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c
index 9abcee32af..f6760eb31e 100644
--- a/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c
+++ b/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c
@@ -338,7 +338,7 @@ tuple_data_split_internal(Oid relid, char *tupdata,
attr = TupleDescAttr(tupdesc, i);
/*
- * Tuple header can specify less attributes than tuple descriptor as
+ * Tuple header can specify fewer attributes than tuple descriptor as
* ALTER TABLE ADD COLUMN without DEFAULT keyword does not actually
* change tuples in pages, so attributes with numbers greater than
* (t_infomask2 & HEAP_NATTS_MASK) should be treated as NULL.
diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml
index cebc09ef91..1b00e543a6 100644
--- a/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml
+++ b/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml
@@ -619,7 +619,7 @@ SELECT * FROM test1 ORDER BY a || b COLLATE "fr_FR";
name such as <literal>de_DE</literal> can be considered unique
within a given database even though it would not be unique globally.
Use of the stripped collation names is recommended, since it will
- make one less thing you need to change if you decide to change to
+ make one fewer thing you need to change if you decide to change to
another database encoding. Note however that the <literal>default</literal>,
<literal>C</literal>, and <literal>POSIX</literal> collations can be used regardless of
the database encoding.
diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml
index 0b24a55505..693423e524 100644
--- a/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml
+++ b/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml
@@ -867,7 +867,7 @@ CREATE TYPE <replaceable class="parameter">name</replaceable>
Before <productname>PostgreSQL</productname> version 8.3, the name of
a generated array type was always exactly the element type's name with one
underscore character (<literal>_</literal>) prepended. (Type names were
- therefore restricted in length to one less character than other names.)
+ therefore restricted in length to one fewer character than other names.)
While this is still usually the case, the array type name may vary from
this in case of maximum-length names or collisions with user type names
that begin with underscore. Writing code that depends on this convention
diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml
index e81addcfa9..aa172d102b 100644
--- a/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml
+++ b/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml
@@ -1266,7 +1266,7 @@ CREATE [ OR REPLACE ] RULE <replaceable class="parameter">name</replaceable> AS
<para>
The query trees generated from rule actions are thrown into the
rewrite system again, and maybe more rules get applied resulting
- in more or less query trees.
+ in additional or fewer query trees.
So a rule's actions must have either a different
command type or a different result relation than the rule itself is
on, otherwise this recursive process will end up in an infinite loop.
diff --git a/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c b/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c
index 24a27e387d..0b56b0fa5a 100644
--- a/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c
+++ b/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c
@@ -719,11 +719,11 @@ heap_copytuple_with_tuple(HeapTuple src, HeapTuple dest)
}
/*
- * Expand a tuple which has less attributes than required. For each attribute
+ * Expand a tuple which has fewer attributes than required. For each attribute
* not present in the sourceTuple, if there is a missing value that will be
* used. Otherwise the attribute will be set to NULL.
*
- * The source tuple must have less attributes than the required number.
+ * The source tuple must have fewer attributes than the required number.
*
* Only one of targetHeapTuple and targetMinimalTuple may be supplied. The
* other argument must be NULL.
diff --git a/src/backend/commands/analyze.c b/src/backend/commands/analyze.c
index 7295cf0215..64908ac39c 100644
--- a/src/backend/commands/analyze.c
+++ b/src/backend/commands/analyze.c
@@ -1003,7 +1003,7 @@ examine_attribute(Relation onerel, int attnum, Node *index_expr)
* As of May 2004 we use a new two-stage method: Stage one selects up
* to targrows random blocks (or all blocks, if there aren't so many).
* Stage two scans these blocks and uses the Vitter algorithm to create
- * a random sample of targrows rows (or less, if there are less in the
+ * a random sample of targrows rows (or fewer, if there are fewer in the
* sample of blocks). The two stages are executed simultaneously: each
* block is processed as soon as stage one returns its number and while
* the rows are read stage two controls which ones are to be inserted
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c b/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c
index 4d185c27b4..078aaef539 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c
@@ -263,7 +263,7 @@ static int compareDatetime(Datum val1, Oid typid1, Datum val2, Oid typid2,
* implement @? and @@ operators, which in turn are intended to have an
* index support. Thus, it's desirable to make it easier to achieve
* consistency between index scan results and sequential scan results.
- * So, we throw as less errors as possible. Regarding this function,
+ * So, we throw as few errors as possible. Regarding this function,
* such behavior also matches behavior of JSON_EXISTS() clause of
* SQL/JSON. Regarding jsonb_path_match(), this function doesn't have
* an analogy in SQL/JSON, so we define its behavior on our own.
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c b/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c
index 47ca4ddbb5..52314d3aa1 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c
@@ -645,7 +645,7 @@ scalarineqsel(PlannerInfo *root, Oid operator, bool isgt, bool iseq,
/*
* The calculation so far gave us a selectivity for the "<=" case.
- * We'll have one less tuple for "<" and one additional tuple for
+ * We'll have one fewer tuple for "<" and one additional tuple for
* ">=", the latter of which we'll reverse the selectivity for
* below, so we can simply subtract one tuple for both cases. The
* cases that need this adjustment can be identified by iseq being
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c b/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c
index fa2b49c676..55c9445898 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c
@@ -1497,7 +1497,7 @@ GetCatCacheHashValue(CatCache *cache,
* It doesn't make any sense to specify all of the cache's key columns
* here: since the key is unique, there could be at most one match, so
* you ought to use SearchCatCache() instead. Hence this function takes
- * one less Datum argument than SearchCatCache() does.
+ * one fewer Datum argument than SearchCatCache() does.
*
* The caller must not modify the list object or the pointed-to tuples,
* and must call ReleaseCatCacheList() when done with the list.
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c b/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c
index 0c327e823f..7348b86682 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c
@@ -42,7 +42,7 @@ BlockSampler_Init(BlockSampler bs, BlockNumber nblocks, int samplesize,
bs->N = nblocks; /* measured table size */
/*
- * If we decide to reduce samplesize for tables that have less or not much
+ * If we decide to reduce samplesize for tables that have fewer or not much
* more than samplesize blocks, here is the place to do it.
*/
bs->n = samplesize;
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c b/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c
index e4ee1aab97..10a1effb74 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c
@@ -495,7 +495,7 @@ FreePageManagerDump(FreePageManager *fpm)
* if we search the parent page for the first key greater than or equal to
* the first key on the current page, the downlink to this page will be either
* the exact index returned by the search (if the first key decreased)
- * or one less (if the first key increased).
+ * or one fewer (if the first key increased).
*/
static void
FreePageBtreeAdjustAncestorKeys(FreePageManager *fpm, FreePageBtree *btp)
diff --git a/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c b/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c
index a4a3f40048..627a244fb7 100644
--- a/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c
+++ b/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c
@@ -6458,7 +6458,7 @@ threadRun(void *arg)
/*
* If advanceConnectionState changed client to finished state,
- * that's one less client that remains.
+ * that's one fewer client that remains.
*/
if (st->state == CSTATE_FINISHED || st->state == CSTATE_ABORTED)
remains--;
diff --git a/src/include/pg_config_manual.h b/src/include/pg_config_manual.h
index d27c8601fa..e3d2e751ea 100644
--- a/src/include/pg_config_manual.h
+++ b/src/include/pg_config_manual.h
@@ -21,7 +21,7 @@
/*
* Maximum length for identifiers (e.g. table names, column names,
- * function names). Names actually are limited to one less byte than this,
+ * function names). Names actually are limited to one fewer byte than this,
* because the length must include a trailing zero byte.
*
* Changing this requires an initdb.
@@ -87,7 +87,7 @@
/*
* MAXPGPATH: standard size of a pathname buffer in PostgreSQL (hence,
- * maximum usable pathname length is one less).
+ * maximum usable pathname length is one fewer).
*
* We'd use a standard system header symbol for this, if there weren't
* so many to choose from: MAXPATHLEN, MAX_PATH, PATH_MAX are all
diff --git a/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h b/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h
index 67d3c7b4e4..9e73f1f1b1 100644
--- a/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h
+++ b/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h
@@ -7,7 +7,7 @@
/*
* Maximum length for identifiers (e.g. table names, column names,
- * function names). Names actually are limited to one less byte than this,
+ * function names). Names actually are limited to one fewer byte than this,
* because the length must include a trailing zero byte.
*
* This should be at least as much as NAMEDATALEN of the database the
diff --git a/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out b/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out
index 84f7eabb66..9799cfbdbd 100644
--- a/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out
+++ b/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out
@@ -4325,7 +4325,7 @@ SELECT f1, polygon(8, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
<(100,1),115> | ((-15,1),(18.6827201635,82.3172798365),(100,116),(181.317279836,82.3172798365),(215,1),(181.317279836,-80.3172798365),(100,-114),(18.6827201635,-80.3172798365))
(6 rows)
--- Too less points error
+-- Too few points error
SELECT f1, polygon(1, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
ERROR: must request at least 2 points
-- Zero radius error
diff --git a/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql b/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql
index 96df0ab05a..b0ab6d03ec 100644
--- a/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql
+++ b/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql
@@ -424,7 +424,7 @@ SELECT f1, f1::polygon FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
-- To polygon with less points
SELECT f1, polygon(8, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
--- Too less points error
+-- Too few points error
SELECT f1, polygon(1, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
-- Zero radius error
--
2.17.0
--lc9FT7cWel8HagAv
Content-Type: text/x-diff; charset=us-ascii
Content-Disposition: attachment;
filename="0007-function-comment-get_am_name.patch"
^ permalink raw reply [nested|flat] 25+ messages in thread
* [PATCH 06/18] One fewer (not one less)
@ 2021-01-18 20:37 Justin Pryzby <[email protected]>
0 siblings, 0 replies; 25+ messages in thread
From: Justin Pryzby @ 2021-01-18 20:37 UTC (permalink / raw)
---
contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c | 2 +-
doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml | 2 +-
doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml | 2 +-
doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml | 2 +-
src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c | 4 ++--
src/backend/commands/analyze.c | 2 +-
src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c | 2 +-
src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c | 2 +-
src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c | 2 +-
src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c | 2 +-
src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c | 2 +-
src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c | 2 +-
src/include/pg_config_manual.h | 4 ++--
src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h | 2 +-
src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out | 2 +-
src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql | 2 +-
16 files changed, 18 insertions(+), 18 deletions(-)
diff --git a/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c b/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c
index 9abcee32af..f6760eb31e 100644
--- a/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c
+++ b/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c
@@ -338,7 +338,7 @@ tuple_data_split_internal(Oid relid, char *tupdata,
attr = TupleDescAttr(tupdesc, i);
/*
- * Tuple header can specify less attributes than tuple descriptor as
+ * Tuple header can specify fewer attributes than tuple descriptor as
* ALTER TABLE ADD COLUMN without DEFAULT keyword does not actually
* change tuples in pages, so attributes with numbers greater than
* (t_infomask2 & HEAP_NATTS_MASK) should be treated as NULL.
diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml
index cebc09ef91..1b00e543a6 100644
--- a/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml
+++ b/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml
@@ -619,7 +619,7 @@ SELECT * FROM test1 ORDER BY a || b COLLATE "fr_FR";
name such as <literal>de_DE</literal> can be considered unique
within a given database even though it would not be unique globally.
Use of the stripped collation names is recommended, since it will
- make one less thing you need to change if you decide to change to
+ make one fewer thing you need to change if you decide to change to
another database encoding. Note however that the <literal>default</literal>,
<literal>C</literal>, and <literal>POSIX</literal> collations can be used regardless of
the database encoding.
diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml
index 0b24a55505..693423e524 100644
--- a/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml
+++ b/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml
@@ -867,7 +867,7 @@ CREATE TYPE <replaceable class="parameter">name</replaceable>
Before <productname>PostgreSQL</productname> version 8.3, the name of
a generated array type was always exactly the element type's name with one
underscore character (<literal>_</literal>) prepended. (Type names were
- therefore restricted in length to one less character than other names.)
+ therefore restricted in length to one fewer character than other names.)
While this is still usually the case, the array type name may vary from
this in case of maximum-length names or collisions with user type names
that begin with underscore. Writing code that depends on this convention
diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml
index e81addcfa9..aa172d102b 100644
--- a/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml
+++ b/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml
@@ -1266,7 +1266,7 @@ CREATE [ OR REPLACE ] RULE <replaceable class="parameter">name</replaceable> AS
<para>
The query trees generated from rule actions are thrown into the
rewrite system again, and maybe more rules get applied resulting
- in more or less query trees.
+ in additional or fewer query trees.
So a rule's actions must have either a different
command type or a different result relation than the rule itself is
on, otherwise this recursive process will end up in an infinite loop.
diff --git a/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c b/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c
index 24a27e387d..0b56b0fa5a 100644
--- a/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c
+++ b/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c
@@ -719,11 +719,11 @@ heap_copytuple_with_tuple(HeapTuple src, HeapTuple dest)
}
/*
- * Expand a tuple which has less attributes than required. For each attribute
+ * Expand a tuple which has fewer attributes than required. For each attribute
* not present in the sourceTuple, if there is a missing value that will be
* used. Otherwise the attribute will be set to NULL.
*
- * The source tuple must have less attributes than the required number.
+ * The source tuple must have fewer attributes than the required number.
*
* Only one of targetHeapTuple and targetMinimalTuple may be supplied. The
* other argument must be NULL.
diff --git a/src/backend/commands/analyze.c b/src/backend/commands/analyze.c
index 7295cf0215..64908ac39c 100644
--- a/src/backend/commands/analyze.c
+++ b/src/backend/commands/analyze.c
@@ -1003,7 +1003,7 @@ examine_attribute(Relation onerel, int attnum, Node *index_expr)
* As of May 2004 we use a new two-stage method: Stage one selects up
* to targrows random blocks (or all blocks, if there aren't so many).
* Stage two scans these blocks and uses the Vitter algorithm to create
- * a random sample of targrows rows (or less, if there are less in the
+ * a random sample of targrows rows (or fewer, if there are fewer in the
* sample of blocks). The two stages are executed simultaneously: each
* block is processed as soon as stage one returns its number and while
* the rows are read stage two controls which ones are to be inserted
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c b/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c
index 4d185c27b4..078aaef539 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c
@@ -263,7 +263,7 @@ static int compareDatetime(Datum val1, Oid typid1, Datum val2, Oid typid2,
* implement @? and @@ operators, which in turn are intended to have an
* index support. Thus, it's desirable to make it easier to achieve
* consistency between index scan results and sequential scan results.
- * So, we throw as less errors as possible. Regarding this function,
+ * So, we throw as few errors as possible. Regarding this function,
* such behavior also matches behavior of JSON_EXISTS() clause of
* SQL/JSON. Regarding jsonb_path_match(), this function doesn't have
* an analogy in SQL/JSON, so we define its behavior on our own.
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c b/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c
index 47ca4ddbb5..52314d3aa1 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c
@@ -645,7 +645,7 @@ scalarineqsel(PlannerInfo *root, Oid operator, bool isgt, bool iseq,
/*
* The calculation so far gave us a selectivity for the "<=" case.
- * We'll have one less tuple for "<" and one additional tuple for
+ * We'll have one fewer tuple for "<" and one additional tuple for
* ">=", the latter of which we'll reverse the selectivity for
* below, so we can simply subtract one tuple for both cases. The
* cases that need this adjustment can be identified by iseq being
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c b/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c
index fa2b49c676..55c9445898 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c
@@ -1497,7 +1497,7 @@ GetCatCacheHashValue(CatCache *cache,
* It doesn't make any sense to specify all of the cache's key columns
* here: since the key is unique, there could be at most one match, so
* you ought to use SearchCatCache() instead. Hence this function takes
- * one less Datum argument than SearchCatCache() does.
+ * one fewer Datum argument than SearchCatCache() does.
*
* The caller must not modify the list object or the pointed-to tuples,
* and must call ReleaseCatCacheList() when done with the list.
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c b/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c
index 0c327e823f..7348b86682 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c
@@ -42,7 +42,7 @@ BlockSampler_Init(BlockSampler bs, BlockNumber nblocks, int samplesize,
bs->N = nblocks; /* measured table size */
/*
- * If we decide to reduce samplesize for tables that have less or not much
+ * If we decide to reduce samplesize for tables that have fewer or not much
* more than samplesize blocks, here is the place to do it.
*/
bs->n = samplesize;
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c b/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c
index e4ee1aab97..10a1effb74 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c
@@ -495,7 +495,7 @@ FreePageManagerDump(FreePageManager *fpm)
* if we search the parent page for the first key greater than or equal to
* the first key on the current page, the downlink to this page will be either
* the exact index returned by the search (if the first key decreased)
- * or one less (if the first key increased).
+ * or one fewer (if the first key increased).
*/
static void
FreePageBtreeAdjustAncestorKeys(FreePageManager *fpm, FreePageBtree *btp)
diff --git a/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c b/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c
index a4a3f40048..627a244fb7 100644
--- a/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c
+++ b/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c
@@ -6458,7 +6458,7 @@ threadRun(void *arg)
/*
* If advanceConnectionState changed client to finished state,
- * that's one less client that remains.
+ * that's one fewer client that remains.
*/
if (st->state == CSTATE_FINISHED || st->state == CSTATE_ABORTED)
remains--;
diff --git a/src/include/pg_config_manual.h b/src/include/pg_config_manual.h
index d27c8601fa..e3d2e751ea 100644
--- a/src/include/pg_config_manual.h
+++ b/src/include/pg_config_manual.h
@@ -21,7 +21,7 @@
/*
* Maximum length for identifiers (e.g. table names, column names,
- * function names). Names actually are limited to one less byte than this,
+ * function names). Names actually are limited to one fewer byte than this,
* because the length must include a trailing zero byte.
*
* Changing this requires an initdb.
@@ -87,7 +87,7 @@
/*
* MAXPGPATH: standard size of a pathname buffer in PostgreSQL (hence,
- * maximum usable pathname length is one less).
+ * maximum usable pathname length is one fewer).
*
* We'd use a standard system header symbol for this, if there weren't
* so many to choose from: MAXPATHLEN, MAX_PATH, PATH_MAX are all
diff --git a/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h b/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h
index 67d3c7b4e4..9e73f1f1b1 100644
--- a/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h
+++ b/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h
@@ -7,7 +7,7 @@
/*
* Maximum length for identifiers (e.g. table names, column names,
- * function names). Names actually are limited to one less byte than this,
+ * function names). Names actually are limited to one fewer byte than this,
* because the length must include a trailing zero byte.
*
* This should be at least as much as NAMEDATALEN of the database the
diff --git a/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out b/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out
index 84f7eabb66..9799cfbdbd 100644
--- a/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out
+++ b/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out
@@ -4325,7 +4325,7 @@ SELECT f1, polygon(8, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
<(100,1),115> | ((-15,1),(18.6827201635,82.3172798365),(100,116),(181.317279836,82.3172798365),(215,1),(181.317279836,-80.3172798365),(100,-114),(18.6827201635,-80.3172798365))
(6 rows)
--- Too less points error
+-- Too few points error
SELECT f1, polygon(1, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
ERROR: must request at least 2 points
-- Zero radius error
diff --git a/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql b/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql
index 96df0ab05a..b0ab6d03ec 100644
--- a/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql
+++ b/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql
@@ -424,7 +424,7 @@ SELECT f1, f1::polygon FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
-- To polygon with less points
SELECT f1, polygon(8, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
--- Too less points error
+-- Too few points error
SELECT f1, polygon(1, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
-- Zero radius error
--
2.17.0
--lc9FT7cWel8HagAv
Content-Type: text/x-diff; charset=us-ascii
Content-Disposition: attachment;
filename="0007-function-comment-get_am_name.patch"
^ permalink raw reply [nested|flat] 25+ messages in thread
* [PATCH 06/18] One fewer (not one less)
@ 2021-01-18 20:37 Justin Pryzby <[email protected]>
0 siblings, 0 replies; 25+ messages in thread
From: Justin Pryzby @ 2021-01-18 20:37 UTC (permalink / raw)
---
contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c | 2 +-
doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml | 2 +-
doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml | 2 +-
doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml | 2 +-
src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c | 4 ++--
src/backend/commands/analyze.c | 2 +-
src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c | 2 +-
src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c | 2 +-
src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c | 2 +-
src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c | 2 +-
src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c | 2 +-
src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c | 2 +-
src/include/pg_config_manual.h | 4 ++--
src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h | 2 +-
src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out | 2 +-
src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql | 2 +-
16 files changed, 18 insertions(+), 18 deletions(-)
diff --git a/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c b/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c
index 9abcee32af..f6760eb31e 100644
--- a/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c
+++ b/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c
@@ -338,7 +338,7 @@ tuple_data_split_internal(Oid relid, char *tupdata,
attr = TupleDescAttr(tupdesc, i);
/*
- * Tuple header can specify less attributes than tuple descriptor as
+ * Tuple header can specify fewer attributes than tuple descriptor as
* ALTER TABLE ADD COLUMN without DEFAULT keyword does not actually
* change tuples in pages, so attributes with numbers greater than
* (t_infomask2 & HEAP_NATTS_MASK) should be treated as NULL.
diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml
index cebc09ef91..1b00e543a6 100644
--- a/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml
+++ b/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml
@@ -619,7 +619,7 @@ SELECT * FROM test1 ORDER BY a || b COLLATE "fr_FR";
name such as <literal>de_DE</literal> can be considered unique
within a given database even though it would not be unique globally.
Use of the stripped collation names is recommended, since it will
- make one less thing you need to change if you decide to change to
+ make one fewer thing you need to change if you decide to change to
another database encoding. Note however that the <literal>default</literal>,
<literal>C</literal>, and <literal>POSIX</literal> collations can be used regardless of
the database encoding.
diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml
index 0b24a55505..693423e524 100644
--- a/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml
+++ b/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml
@@ -867,7 +867,7 @@ CREATE TYPE <replaceable class="parameter">name</replaceable>
Before <productname>PostgreSQL</productname> version 8.3, the name of
a generated array type was always exactly the element type's name with one
underscore character (<literal>_</literal>) prepended. (Type names were
- therefore restricted in length to one less character than other names.)
+ therefore restricted in length to one fewer character than other names.)
While this is still usually the case, the array type name may vary from
this in case of maximum-length names or collisions with user type names
that begin with underscore. Writing code that depends on this convention
diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml
index e81addcfa9..aa172d102b 100644
--- a/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml
+++ b/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml
@@ -1266,7 +1266,7 @@ CREATE [ OR REPLACE ] RULE <replaceable class="parameter">name</replaceable> AS
<para>
The query trees generated from rule actions are thrown into the
rewrite system again, and maybe more rules get applied resulting
- in more or less query trees.
+ in additional or fewer query trees.
So a rule's actions must have either a different
command type or a different result relation than the rule itself is
on, otherwise this recursive process will end up in an infinite loop.
diff --git a/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c b/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c
index 24a27e387d..0b56b0fa5a 100644
--- a/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c
+++ b/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c
@@ -719,11 +719,11 @@ heap_copytuple_with_tuple(HeapTuple src, HeapTuple dest)
}
/*
- * Expand a tuple which has less attributes than required. For each attribute
+ * Expand a tuple which has fewer attributes than required. For each attribute
* not present in the sourceTuple, if there is a missing value that will be
* used. Otherwise the attribute will be set to NULL.
*
- * The source tuple must have less attributes than the required number.
+ * The source tuple must have fewer attributes than the required number.
*
* Only one of targetHeapTuple and targetMinimalTuple may be supplied. The
* other argument must be NULL.
diff --git a/src/backend/commands/analyze.c b/src/backend/commands/analyze.c
index 7295cf0215..64908ac39c 100644
--- a/src/backend/commands/analyze.c
+++ b/src/backend/commands/analyze.c
@@ -1003,7 +1003,7 @@ examine_attribute(Relation onerel, int attnum, Node *index_expr)
* As of May 2004 we use a new two-stage method: Stage one selects up
* to targrows random blocks (or all blocks, if there aren't so many).
* Stage two scans these blocks and uses the Vitter algorithm to create
- * a random sample of targrows rows (or less, if there are less in the
+ * a random sample of targrows rows (or fewer, if there are fewer in the
* sample of blocks). The two stages are executed simultaneously: each
* block is processed as soon as stage one returns its number and while
* the rows are read stage two controls which ones are to be inserted
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c b/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c
index 4d185c27b4..078aaef539 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c
@@ -263,7 +263,7 @@ static int compareDatetime(Datum val1, Oid typid1, Datum val2, Oid typid2,
* implement @? and @@ operators, which in turn are intended to have an
* index support. Thus, it's desirable to make it easier to achieve
* consistency between index scan results and sequential scan results.
- * So, we throw as less errors as possible. Regarding this function,
+ * So, we throw as few errors as possible. Regarding this function,
* such behavior also matches behavior of JSON_EXISTS() clause of
* SQL/JSON. Regarding jsonb_path_match(), this function doesn't have
* an analogy in SQL/JSON, so we define its behavior on our own.
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c b/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c
index 47ca4ddbb5..52314d3aa1 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c
@@ -645,7 +645,7 @@ scalarineqsel(PlannerInfo *root, Oid operator, bool isgt, bool iseq,
/*
* The calculation so far gave us a selectivity for the "<=" case.
- * We'll have one less tuple for "<" and one additional tuple for
+ * We'll have one fewer tuple for "<" and one additional tuple for
* ">=", the latter of which we'll reverse the selectivity for
* below, so we can simply subtract one tuple for both cases. The
* cases that need this adjustment can be identified by iseq being
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c b/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c
index fa2b49c676..55c9445898 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c
@@ -1497,7 +1497,7 @@ GetCatCacheHashValue(CatCache *cache,
* It doesn't make any sense to specify all of the cache's key columns
* here: since the key is unique, there could be at most one match, so
* you ought to use SearchCatCache() instead. Hence this function takes
- * one less Datum argument than SearchCatCache() does.
+ * one fewer Datum argument than SearchCatCache() does.
*
* The caller must not modify the list object or the pointed-to tuples,
* and must call ReleaseCatCacheList() when done with the list.
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c b/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c
index 0c327e823f..7348b86682 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c
@@ -42,7 +42,7 @@ BlockSampler_Init(BlockSampler bs, BlockNumber nblocks, int samplesize,
bs->N = nblocks; /* measured table size */
/*
- * If we decide to reduce samplesize for tables that have less or not much
+ * If we decide to reduce samplesize for tables that have fewer or not much
* more than samplesize blocks, here is the place to do it.
*/
bs->n = samplesize;
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c b/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c
index e4ee1aab97..10a1effb74 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c
@@ -495,7 +495,7 @@ FreePageManagerDump(FreePageManager *fpm)
* if we search the parent page for the first key greater than or equal to
* the first key on the current page, the downlink to this page will be either
* the exact index returned by the search (if the first key decreased)
- * or one less (if the first key increased).
+ * or one fewer (if the first key increased).
*/
static void
FreePageBtreeAdjustAncestorKeys(FreePageManager *fpm, FreePageBtree *btp)
diff --git a/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c b/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c
index a4a3f40048..627a244fb7 100644
--- a/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c
+++ b/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c
@@ -6458,7 +6458,7 @@ threadRun(void *arg)
/*
* If advanceConnectionState changed client to finished state,
- * that's one less client that remains.
+ * that's one fewer client that remains.
*/
if (st->state == CSTATE_FINISHED || st->state == CSTATE_ABORTED)
remains--;
diff --git a/src/include/pg_config_manual.h b/src/include/pg_config_manual.h
index d27c8601fa..e3d2e751ea 100644
--- a/src/include/pg_config_manual.h
+++ b/src/include/pg_config_manual.h
@@ -21,7 +21,7 @@
/*
* Maximum length for identifiers (e.g. table names, column names,
- * function names). Names actually are limited to one less byte than this,
+ * function names). Names actually are limited to one fewer byte than this,
* because the length must include a trailing zero byte.
*
* Changing this requires an initdb.
@@ -87,7 +87,7 @@
/*
* MAXPGPATH: standard size of a pathname buffer in PostgreSQL (hence,
- * maximum usable pathname length is one less).
+ * maximum usable pathname length is one fewer).
*
* We'd use a standard system header symbol for this, if there weren't
* so many to choose from: MAXPATHLEN, MAX_PATH, PATH_MAX are all
diff --git a/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h b/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h
index 67d3c7b4e4..9e73f1f1b1 100644
--- a/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h
+++ b/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h
@@ -7,7 +7,7 @@
/*
* Maximum length for identifiers (e.g. table names, column names,
- * function names). Names actually are limited to one less byte than this,
+ * function names). Names actually are limited to one fewer byte than this,
* because the length must include a trailing zero byte.
*
* This should be at least as much as NAMEDATALEN of the database the
diff --git a/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out b/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out
index 84f7eabb66..9799cfbdbd 100644
--- a/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out
+++ b/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out
@@ -4325,7 +4325,7 @@ SELECT f1, polygon(8, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
<(100,1),115> | ((-15,1),(18.6827201635,82.3172798365),(100,116),(181.317279836,82.3172798365),(215,1),(181.317279836,-80.3172798365),(100,-114),(18.6827201635,-80.3172798365))
(6 rows)
--- Too less points error
+-- Too few points error
SELECT f1, polygon(1, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
ERROR: must request at least 2 points
-- Zero radius error
diff --git a/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql b/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql
index 96df0ab05a..b0ab6d03ec 100644
--- a/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql
+++ b/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql
@@ -424,7 +424,7 @@ SELECT f1, f1::polygon FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
-- To polygon with less points
SELECT f1, polygon(8, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
--- Too less points error
+-- Too few points error
SELECT f1, polygon(1, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
-- Zero radius error
--
2.17.0
--lc9FT7cWel8HagAv
Content-Type: text/x-diff; charset=us-ascii
Content-Disposition: attachment;
filename="0007-function-comment-get_am_name.patch"
^ permalink raw reply [nested|flat] 25+ messages in thread
* [PATCH 06/18] One fewer (not one less)
@ 2021-01-18 20:37 Justin Pryzby <[email protected]>
0 siblings, 0 replies; 25+ messages in thread
From: Justin Pryzby @ 2021-01-18 20:37 UTC (permalink / raw)
---
contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c | 2 +-
doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml | 2 +-
doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml | 2 +-
doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml | 2 +-
src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c | 4 ++--
src/backend/commands/analyze.c | 2 +-
src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c | 2 +-
src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c | 2 +-
src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c | 2 +-
src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c | 2 +-
src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c | 2 +-
src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c | 2 +-
src/include/pg_config_manual.h | 4 ++--
src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h | 2 +-
src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out | 2 +-
src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql | 2 +-
16 files changed, 18 insertions(+), 18 deletions(-)
diff --git a/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c b/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c
index 9abcee32af..f6760eb31e 100644
--- a/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c
+++ b/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c
@@ -338,7 +338,7 @@ tuple_data_split_internal(Oid relid, char *tupdata,
attr = TupleDescAttr(tupdesc, i);
/*
- * Tuple header can specify less attributes than tuple descriptor as
+ * Tuple header can specify fewer attributes than tuple descriptor as
* ALTER TABLE ADD COLUMN without DEFAULT keyword does not actually
* change tuples in pages, so attributes with numbers greater than
* (t_infomask2 & HEAP_NATTS_MASK) should be treated as NULL.
diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml
index cebc09ef91..1b00e543a6 100644
--- a/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml
+++ b/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml
@@ -619,7 +619,7 @@ SELECT * FROM test1 ORDER BY a || b COLLATE "fr_FR";
name such as <literal>de_DE</literal> can be considered unique
within a given database even though it would not be unique globally.
Use of the stripped collation names is recommended, since it will
- make one less thing you need to change if you decide to change to
+ make one fewer thing you need to change if you decide to change to
another database encoding. Note however that the <literal>default</literal>,
<literal>C</literal>, and <literal>POSIX</literal> collations can be used regardless of
the database encoding.
diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml
index 0b24a55505..693423e524 100644
--- a/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml
+++ b/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml
@@ -867,7 +867,7 @@ CREATE TYPE <replaceable class="parameter">name</replaceable>
Before <productname>PostgreSQL</productname> version 8.3, the name of
a generated array type was always exactly the element type's name with one
underscore character (<literal>_</literal>) prepended. (Type names were
- therefore restricted in length to one less character than other names.)
+ therefore restricted in length to one fewer character than other names.)
While this is still usually the case, the array type name may vary from
this in case of maximum-length names or collisions with user type names
that begin with underscore. Writing code that depends on this convention
diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml
index e81addcfa9..aa172d102b 100644
--- a/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml
+++ b/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml
@@ -1266,7 +1266,7 @@ CREATE [ OR REPLACE ] RULE <replaceable class="parameter">name</replaceable> AS
<para>
The query trees generated from rule actions are thrown into the
rewrite system again, and maybe more rules get applied resulting
- in more or less query trees.
+ in additional or fewer query trees.
So a rule's actions must have either a different
command type or a different result relation than the rule itself is
on, otherwise this recursive process will end up in an infinite loop.
diff --git a/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c b/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c
index 24a27e387d..0b56b0fa5a 100644
--- a/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c
+++ b/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c
@@ -719,11 +719,11 @@ heap_copytuple_with_tuple(HeapTuple src, HeapTuple dest)
}
/*
- * Expand a tuple which has less attributes than required. For each attribute
+ * Expand a tuple which has fewer attributes than required. For each attribute
* not present in the sourceTuple, if there is a missing value that will be
* used. Otherwise the attribute will be set to NULL.
*
- * The source tuple must have less attributes than the required number.
+ * The source tuple must have fewer attributes than the required number.
*
* Only one of targetHeapTuple and targetMinimalTuple may be supplied. The
* other argument must be NULL.
diff --git a/src/backend/commands/analyze.c b/src/backend/commands/analyze.c
index 7295cf0215..64908ac39c 100644
--- a/src/backend/commands/analyze.c
+++ b/src/backend/commands/analyze.c
@@ -1003,7 +1003,7 @@ examine_attribute(Relation onerel, int attnum, Node *index_expr)
* As of May 2004 we use a new two-stage method: Stage one selects up
* to targrows random blocks (or all blocks, if there aren't so many).
* Stage two scans these blocks and uses the Vitter algorithm to create
- * a random sample of targrows rows (or less, if there are less in the
+ * a random sample of targrows rows (or fewer, if there are fewer in the
* sample of blocks). The two stages are executed simultaneously: each
* block is processed as soon as stage one returns its number and while
* the rows are read stage two controls which ones are to be inserted
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c b/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c
index 4d185c27b4..078aaef539 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c
@@ -263,7 +263,7 @@ static int compareDatetime(Datum val1, Oid typid1, Datum val2, Oid typid2,
* implement @? and @@ operators, which in turn are intended to have an
* index support. Thus, it's desirable to make it easier to achieve
* consistency between index scan results and sequential scan results.
- * So, we throw as less errors as possible. Regarding this function,
+ * So, we throw as few errors as possible. Regarding this function,
* such behavior also matches behavior of JSON_EXISTS() clause of
* SQL/JSON. Regarding jsonb_path_match(), this function doesn't have
* an analogy in SQL/JSON, so we define its behavior on our own.
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c b/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c
index 47ca4ddbb5..52314d3aa1 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c
@@ -645,7 +645,7 @@ scalarineqsel(PlannerInfo *root, Oid operator, bool isgt, bool iseq,
/*
* The calculation so far gave us a selectivity for the "<=" case.
- * We'll have one less tuple for "<" and one additional tuple for
+ * We'll have one fewer tuple for "<" and one additional tuple for
* ">=", the latter of which we'll reverse the selectivity for
* below, so we can simply subtract one tuple for both cases. The
* cases that need this adjustment can be identified by iseq being
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c b/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c
index fa2b49c676..55c9445898 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c
@@ -1497,7 +1497,7 @@ GetCatCacheHashValue(CatCache *cache,
* It doesn't make any sense to specify all of the cache's key columns
* here: since the key is unique, there could be at most one match, so
* you ought to use SearchCatCache() instead. Hence this function takes
- * one less Datum argument than SearchCatCache() does.
+ * one fewer Datum argument than SearchCatCache() does.
*
* The caller must not modify the list object or the pointed-to tuples,
* and must call ReleaseCatCacheList() when done with the list.
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c b/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c
index 0c327e823f..7348b86682 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c
@@ -42,7 +42,7 @@ BlockSampler_Init(BlockSampler bs, BlockNumber nblocks, int samplesize,
bs->N = nblocks; /* measured table size */
/*
- * If we decide to reduce samplesize for tables that have less or not much
+ * If we decide to reduce samplesize for tables that have fewer or not much
* more than samplesize blocks, here is the place to do it.
*/
bs->n = samplesize;
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c b/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c
index e4ee1aab97..10a1effb74 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c
@@ -495,7 +495,7 @@ FreePageManagerDump(FreePageManager *fpm)
* if we search the parent page for the first key greater than or equal to
* the first key on the current page, the downlink to this page will be either
* the exact index returned by the search (if the first key decreased)
- * or one less (if the first key increased).
+ * or one fewer (if the first key increased).
*/
static void
FreePageBtreeAdjustAncestorKeys(FreePageManager *fpm, FreePageBtree *btp)
diff --git a/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c b/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c
index a4a3f40048..627a244fb7 100644
--- a/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c
+++ b/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c
@@ -6458,7 +6458,7 @@ threadRun(void *arg)
/*
* If advanceConnectionState changed client to finished state,
- * that's one less client that remains.
+ * that's one fewer client that remains.
*/
if (st->state == CSTATE_FINISHED || st->state == CSTATE_ABORTED)
remains--;
diff --git a/src/include/pg_config_manual.h b/src/include/pg_config_manual.h
index d27c8601fa..e3d2e751ea 100644
--- a/src/include/pg_config_manual.h
+++ b/src/include/pg_config_manual.h
@@ -21,7 +21,7 @@
/*
* Maximum length for identifiers (e.g. table names, column names,
- * function names). Names actually are limited to one less byte than this,
+ * function names). Names actually are limited to one fewer byte than this,
* because the length must include a trailing zero byte.
*
* Changing this requires an initdb.
@@ -87,7 +87,7 @@
/*
* MAXPGPATH: standard size of a pathname buffer in PostgreSQL (hence,
- * maximum usable pathname length is one less).
+ * maximum usable pathname length is one fewer).
*
* We'd use a standard system header symbol for this, if there weren't
* so many to choose from: MAXPATHLEN, MAX_PATH, PATH_MAX are all
diff --git a/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h b/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h
index 67d3c7b4e4..9e73f1f1b1 100644
--- a/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h
+++ b/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h
@@ -7,7 +7,7 @@
/*
* Maximum length for identifiers (e.g. table names, column names,
- * function names). Names actually are limited to one less byte than this,
+ * function names). Names actually are limited to one fewer byte than this,
* because the length must include a trailing zero byte.
*
* This should be at least as much as NAMEDATALEN of the database the
diff --git a/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out b/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out
index 84f7eabb66..9799cfbdbd 100644
--- a/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out
+++ b/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out
@@ -4325,7 +4325,7 @@ SELECT f1, polygon(8, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
<(100,1),115> | ((-15,1),(18.6827201635,82.3172798365),(100,116),(181.317279836,82.3172798365),(215,1),(181.317279836,-80.3172798365),(100,-114),(18.6827201635,-80.3172798365))
(6 rows)
--- Too less points error
+-- Too few points error
SELECT f1, polygon(1, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
ERROR: must request at least 2 points
-- Zero radius error
diff --git a/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql b/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql
index 96df0ab05a..b0ab6d03ec 100644
--- a/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql
+++ b/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql
@@ -424,7 +424,7 @@ SELECT f1, f1::polygon FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
-- To polygon with less points
SELECT f1, polygon(8, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
--- Too less points error
+-- Too few points error
SELECT f1, polygon(1, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
-- Zero radius error
--
2.17.0
--lc9FT7cWel8HagAv
Content-Type: text/x-diff; charset=us-ascii
Content-Disposition: attachment;
filename="0007-function-comment-get_am_name.patch"
^ permalink raw reply [nested|flat] 25+ messages in thread
* [PATCH 06/18] One fewer (not one less)
@ 2021-01-18 20:37 Justin Pryzby <[email protected]>
0 siblings, 0 replies; 25+ messages in thread
From: Justin Pryzby @ 2021-01-18 20:37 UTC (permalink / raw)
---
contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c | 2 +-
doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml | 2 +-
doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml | 2 +-
doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml | 2 +-
src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c | 4 ++--
src/backend/commands/analyze.c | 2 +-
src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c | 2 +-
src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c | 2 +-
src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c | 2 +-
src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c | 2 +-
src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c | 2 +-
src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c | 2 +-
src/include/pg_config_manual.h | 4 ++--
src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h | 2 +-
src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out | 2 +-
src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql | 2 +-
16 files changed, 18 insertions(+), 18 deletions(-)
diff --git a/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c b/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c
index 9abcee32af..f6760eb31e 100644
--- a/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c
+++ b/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c
@@ -338,7 +338,7 @@ tuple_data_split_internal(Oid relid, char *tupdata,
attr = TupleDescAttr(tupdesc, i);
/*
- * Tuple header can specify less attributes than tuple descriptor as
+ * Tuple header can specify fewer attributes than tuple descriptor as
* ALTER TABLE ADD COLUMN without DEFAULT keyword does not actually
* change tuples in pages, so attributes with numbers greater than
* (t_infomask2 & HEAP_NATTS_MASK) should be treated as NULL.
diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml
index cebc09ef91..1b00e543a6 100644
--- a/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml
+++ b/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml
@@ -619,7 +619,7 @@ SELECT * FROM test1 ORDER BY a || b COLLATE "fr_FR";
name such as <literal>de_DE</literal> can be considered unique
within a given database even though it would not be unique globally.
Use of the stripped collation names is recommended, since it will
- make one less thing you need to change if you decide to change to
+ make one fewer thing you need to change if you decide to change to
another database encoding. Note however that the <literal>default</literal>,
<literal>C</literal>, and <literal>POSIX</literal> collations can be used regardless of
the database encoding.
diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml
index 0b24a55505..693423e524 100644
--- a/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml
+++ b/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml
@@ -867,7 +867,7 @@ CREATE TYPE <replaceable class="parameter">name</replaceable>
Before <productname>PostgreSQL</productname> version 8.3, the name of
a generated array type was always exactly the element type's name with one
underscore character (<literal>_</literal>) prepended. (Type names were
- therefore restricted in length to one less character than other names.)
+ therefore restricted in length to one fewer character than other names.)
While this is still usually the case, the array type name may vary from
this in case of maximum-length names or collisions with user type names
that begin with underscore. Writing code that depends on this convention
diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml
index e81addcfa9..aa172d102b 100644
--- a/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml
+++ b/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml
@@ -1266,7 +1266,7 @@ CREATE [ OR REPLACE ] RULE <replaceable class="parameter">name</replaceable> AS
<para>
The query trees generated from rule actions are thrown into the
rewrite system again, and maybe more rules get applied resulting
- in more or less query trees.
+ in additional or fewer query trees.
So a rule's actions must have either a different
command type or a different result relation than the rule itself is
on, otherwise this recursive process will end up in an infinite loop.
diff --git a/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c b/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c
index 24a27e387d..0b56b0fa5a 100644
--- a/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c
+++ b/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c
@@ -719,11 +719,11 @@ heap_copytuple_with_tuple(HeapTuple src, HeapTuple dest)
}
/*
- * Expand a tuple which has less attributes than required. For each attribute
+ * Expand a tuple which has fewer attributes than required. For each attribute
* not present in the sourceTuple, if there is a missing value that will be
* used. Otherwise the attribute will be set to NULL.
*
- * The source tuple must have less attributes than the required number.
+ * The source tuple must have fewer attributes than the required number.
*
* Only one of targetHeapTuple and targetMinimalTuple may be supplied. The
* other argument must be NULL.
diff --git a/src/backend/commands/analyze.c b/src/backend/commands/analyze.c
index 7295cf0215..64908ac39c 100644
--- a/src/backend/commands/analyze.c
+++ b/src/backend/commands/analyze.c
@@ -1003,7 +1003,7 @@ examine_attribute(Relation onerel, int attnum, Node *index_expr)
* As of May 2004 we use a new two-stage method: Stage one selects up
* to targrows random blocks (or all blocks, if there aren't so many).
* Stage two scans these blocks and uses the Vitter algorithm to create
- * a random sample of targrows rows (or less, if there are less in the
+ * a random sample of targrows rows (or fewer, if there are fewer in the
* sample of blocks). The two stages are executed simultaneously: each
* block is processed as soon as stage one returns its number and while
* the rows are read stage two controls which ones are to be inserted
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c b/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c
index 4d185c27b4..078aaef539 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c
@@ -263,7 +263,7 @@ static int compareDatetime(Datum val1, Oid typid1, Datum val2, Oid typid2,
* implement @? and @@ operators, which in turn are intended to have an
* index support. Thus, it's desirable to make it easier to achieve
* consistency between index scan results and sequential scan results.
- * So, we throw as less errors as possible. Regarding this function,
+ * So, we throw as few errors as possible. Regarding this function,
* such behavior also matches behavior of JSON_EXISTS() clause of
* SQL/JSON. Regarding jsonb_path_match(), this function doesn't have
* an analogy in SQL/JSON, so we define its behavior on our own.
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c b/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c
index 47ca4ddbb5..52314d3aa1 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c
@@ -645,7 +645,7 @@ scalarineqsel(PlannerInfo *root, Oid operator, bool isgt, bool iseq,
/*
* The calculation so far gave us a selectivity for the "<=" case.
- * We'll have one less tuple for "<" and one additional tuple for
+ * We'll have one fewer tuple for "<" and one additional tuple for
* ">=", the latter of which we'll reverse the selectivity for
* below, so we can simply subtract one tuple for both cases. The
* cases that need this adjustment can be identified by iseq being
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c b/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c
index fa2b49c676..55c9445898 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c
@@ -1497,7 +1497,7 @@ GetCatCacheHashValue(CatCache *cache,
* It doesn't make any sense to specify all of the cache's key columns
* here: since the key is unique, there could be at most one match, so
* you ought to use SearchCatCache() instead. Hence this function takes
- * one less Datum argument than SearchCatCache() does.
+ * one fewer Datum argument than SearchCatCache() does.
*
* The caller must not modify the list object or the pointed-to tuples,
* and must call ReleaseCatCacheList() when done with the list.
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c b/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c
index 0c327e823f..7348b86682 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c
@@ -42,7 +42,7 @@ BlockSampler_Init(BlockSampler bs, BlockNumber nblocks, int samplesize,
bs->N = nblocks; /* measured table size */
/*
- * If we decide to reduce samplesize for tables that have less or not much
+ * If we decide to reduce samplesize for tables that have fewer or not much
* more than samplesize blocks, here is the place to do it.
*/
bs->n = samplesize;
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c b/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c
index e4ee1aab97..10a1effb74 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c
@@ -495,7 +495,7 @@ FreePageManagerDump(FreePageManager *fpm)
* if we search the parent page for the first key greater than or equal to
* the first key on the current page, the downlink to this page will be either
* the exact index returned by the search (if the first key decreased)
- * or one less (if the first key increased).
+ * or one fewer (if the first key increased).
*/
static void
FreePageBtreeAdjustAncestorKeys(FreePageManager *fpm, FreePageBtree *btp)
diff --git a/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c b/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c
index a4a3f40048..627a244fb7 100644
--- a/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c
+++ b/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c
@@ -6458,7 +6458,7 @@ threadRun(void *arg)
/*
* If advanceConnectionState changed client to finished state,
- * that's one less client that remains.
+ * that's one fewer client that remains.
*/
if (st->state == CSTATE_FINISHED || st->state == CSTATE_ABORTED)
remains--;
diff --git a/src/include/pg_config_manual.h b/src/include/pg_config_manual.h
index d27c8601fa..e3d2e751ea 100644
--- a/src/include/pg_config_manual.h
+++ b/src/include/pg_config_manual.h
@@ -21,7 +21,7 @@
/*
* Maximum length for identifiers (e.g. table names, column names,
- * function names). Names actually are limited to one less byte than this,
+ * function names). Names actually are limited to one fewer byte than this,
* because the length must include a trailing zero byte.
*
* Changing this requires an initdb.
@@ -87,7 +87,7 @@
/*
* MAXPGPATH: standard size of a pathname buffer in PostgreSQL (hence,
- * maximum usable pathname length is one less).
+ * maximum usable pathname length is one fewer).
*
* We'd use a standard system header symbol for this, if there weren't
* so many to choose from: MAXPATHLEN, MAX_PATH, PATH_MAX are all
diff --git a/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h b/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h
index 67d3c7b4e4..9e73f1f1b1 100644
--- a/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h
+++ b/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h
@@ -7,7 +7,7 @@
/*
* Maximum length for identifiers (e.g. table names, column names,
- * function names). Names actually are limited to one less byte than this,
+ * function names). Names actually are limited to one fewer byte than this,
* because the length must include a trailing zero byte.
*
* This should be at least as much as NAMEDATALEN of the database the
diff --git a/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out b/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out
index 84f7eabb66..9799cfbdbd 100644
--- a/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out
+++ b/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out
@@ -4325,7 +4325,7 @@ SELECT f1, polygon(8, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
<(100,1),115> | ((-15,1),(18.6827201635,82.3172798365),(100,116),(181.317279836,82.3172798365),(215,1),(181.317279836,-80.3172798365),(100,-114),(18.6827201635,-80.3172798365))
(6 rows)
--- Too less points error
+-- Too few points error
SELECT f1, polygon(1, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
ERROR: must request at least 2 points
-- Zero radius error
diff --git a/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql b/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql
index 96df0ab05a..b0ab6d03ec 100644
--- a/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql
+++ b/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql
@@ -424,7 +424,7 @@ SELECT f1, f1::polygon FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
-- To polygon with less points
SELECT f1, polygon(8, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
--- Too less points error
+-- Too few points error
SELECT f1, polygon(1, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
-- Zero radius error
--
2.17.0
--lc9FT7cWel8HagAv
Content-Type: text/x-diff; charset=us-ascii
Content-Disposition: attachment;
filename="0007-function-comment-get_am_name.patch"
^ permalink raw reply [nested|flat] 25+ messages in thread
* [PATCH 06/18] One fewer (not one less)
@ 2021-01-18 20:37 Justin Pryzby <[email protected]>
0 siblings, 0 replies; 25+ messages in thread
From: Justin Pryzby @ 2021-01-18 20:37 UTC (permalink / raw)
---
contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c | 2 +-
doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml | 2 +-
doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml | 2 +-
doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml | 2 +-
src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c | 4 ++--
src/backend/commands/analyze.c | 2 +-
src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c | 2 +-
src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c | 2 +-
src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c | 2 +-
src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c | 2 +-
src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c | 2 +-
src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c | 2 +-
src/include/pg_config_manual.h | 4 ++--
src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h | 2 +-
src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out | 2 +-
src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql | 2 +-
16 files changed, 18 insertions(+), 18 deletions(-)
diff --git a/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c b/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c
index 9abcee32af..f6760eb31e 100644
--- a/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c
+++ b/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c
@@ -338,7 +338,7 @@ tuple_data_split_internal(Oid relid, char *tupdata,
attr = TupleDescAttr(tupdesc, i);
/*
- * Tuple header can specify less attributes than tuple descriptor as
+ * Tuple header can specify fewer attributes than tuple descriptor as
* ALTER TABLE ADD COLUMN without DEFAULT keyword does not actually
* change tuples in pages, so attributes with numbers greater than
* (t_infomask2 & HEAP_NATTS_MASK) should be treated as NULL.
diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml
index cebc09ef91..1b00e543a6 100644
--- a/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml
+++ b/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml
@@ -619,7 +619,7 @@ SELECT * FROM test1 ORDER BY a || b COLLATE "fr_FR";
name such as <literal>de_DE</literal> can be considered unique
within a given database even though it would not be unique globally.
Use of the stripped collation names is recommended, since it will
- make one less thing you need to change if you decide to change to
+ make one fewer thing you need to change if you decide to change to
another database encoding. Note however that the <literal>default</literal>,
<literal>C</literal>, and <literal>POSIX</literal> collations can be used regardless of
the database encoding.
diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml
index 0b24a55505..693423e524 100644
--- a/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml
+++ b/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml
@@ -867,7 +867,7 @@ CREATE TYPE <replaceable class="parameter">name</replaceable>
Before <productname>PostgreSQL</productname> version 8.3, the name of
a generated array type was always exactly the element type's name with one
underscore character (<literal>_</literal>) prepended. (Type names were
- therefore restricted in length to one less character than other names.)
+ therefore restricted in length to one fewer character than other names.)
While this is still usually the case, the array type name may vary from
this in case of maximum-length names or collisions with user type names
that begin with underscore. Writing code that depends on this convention
diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml
index e81addcfa9..aa172d102b 100644
--- a/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml
+++ b/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml
@@ -1266,7 +1266,7 @@ CREATE [ OR REPLACE ] RULE <replaceable class="parameter">name</replaceable> AS
<para>
The query trees generated from rule actions are thrown into the
rewrite system again, and maybe more rules get applied resulting
- in more or less query trees.
+ in additional or fewer query trees.
So a rule's actions must have either a different
command type or a different result relation than the rule itself is
on, otherwise this recursive process will end up in an infinite loop.
diff --git a/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c b/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c
index 24a27e387d..0b56b0fa5a 100644
--- a/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c
+++ b/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c
@@ -719,11 +719,11 @@ heap_copytuple_with_tuple(HeapTuple src, HeapTuple dest)
}
/*
- * Expand a tuple which has less attributes than required. For each attribute
+ * Expand a tuple which has fewer attributes than required. For each attribute
* not present in the sourceTuple, if there is a missing value that will be
* used. Otherwise the attribute will be set to NULL.
*
- * The source tuple must have less attributes than the required number.
+ * The source tuple must have fewer attributes than the required number.
*
* Only one of targetHeapTuple and targetMinimalTuple may be supplied. The
* other argument must be NULL.
diff --git a/src/backend/commands/analyze.c b/src/backend/commands/analyze.c
index 7295cf0215..64908ac39c 100644
--- a/src/backend/commands/analyze.c
+++ b/src/backend/commands/analyze.c
@@ -1003,7 +1003,7 @@ examine_attribute(Relation onerel, int attnum, Node *index_expr)
* As of May 2004 we use a new two-stage method: Stage one selects up
* to targrows random blocks (or all blocks, if there aren't so many).
* Stage two scans these blocks and uses the Vitter algorithm to create
- * a random sample of targrows rows (or less, if there are less in the
+ * a random sample of targrows rows (or fewer, if there are fewer in the
* sample of blocks). The two stages are executed simultaneously: each
* block is processed as soon as stage one returns its number and while
* the rows are read stage two controls which ones are to be inserted
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c b/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c
index 4d185c27b4..078aaef539 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c
@@ -263,7 +263,7 @@ static int compareDatetime(Datum val1, Oid typid1, Datum val2, Oid typid2,
* implement @? and @@ operators, which in turn are intended to have an
* index support. Thus, it's desirable to make it easier to achieve
* consistency between index scan results and sequential scan results.
- * So, we throw as less errors as possible. Regarding this function,
+ * So, we throw as few errors as possible. Regarding this function,
* such behavior also matches behavior of JSON_EXISTS() clause of
* SQL/JSON. Regarding jsonb_path_match(), this function doesn't have
* an analogy in SQL/JSON, so we define its behavior on our own.
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c b/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c
index 47ca4ddbb5..52314d3aa1 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c
@@ -645,7 +645,7 @@ scalarineqsel(PlannerInfo *root, Oid operator, bool isgt, bool iseq,
/*
* The calculation so far gave us a selectivity for the "<=" case.
- * We'll have one less tuple for "<" and one additional tuple for
+ * We'll have one fewer tuple for "<" and one additional tuple for
* ">=", the latter of which we'll reverse the selectivity for
* below, so we can simply subtract one tuple for both cases. The
* cases that need this adjustment can be identified by iseq being
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c b/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c
index fa2b49c676..55c9445898 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c
@@ -1497,7 +1497,7 @@ GetCatCacheHashValue(CatCache *cache,
* It doesn't make any sense to specify all of the cache's key columns
* here: since the key is unique, there could be at most one match, so
* you ought to use SearchCatCache() instead. Hence this function takes
- * one less Datum argument than SearchCatCache() does.
+ * one fewer Datum argument than SearchCatCache() does.
*
* The caller must not modify the list object or the pointed-to tuples,
* and must call ReleaseCatCacheList() when done with the list.
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c b/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c
index 0c327e823f..7348b86682 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c
@@ -42,7 +42,7 @@ BlockSampler_Init(BlockSampler bs, BlockNumber nblocks, int samplesize,
bs->N = nblocks; /* measured table size */
/*
- * If we decide to reduce samplesize for tables that have less or not much
+ * If we decide to reduce samplesize for tables that have fewer or not much
* more than samplesize blocks, here is the place to do it.
*/
bs->n = samplesize;
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c b/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c
index e4ee1aab97..10a1effb74 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c
@@ -495,7 +495,7 @@ FreePageManagerDump(FreePageManager *fpm)
* if we search the parent page for the first key greater than or equal to
* the first key on the current page, the downlink to this page will be either
* the exact index returned by the search (if the first key decreased)
- * or one less (if the first key increased).
+ * or one fewer (if the first key increased).
*/
static void
FreePageBtreeAdjustAncestorKeys(FreePageManager *fpm, FreePageBtree *btp)
diff --git a/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c b/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c
index a4a3f40048..627a244fb7 100644
--- a/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c
+++ b/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c
@@ -6458,7 +6458,7 @@ threadRun(void *arg)
/*
* If advanceConnectionState changed client to finished state,
- * that's one less client that remains.
+ * that's one fewer client that remains.
*/
if (st->state == CSTATE_FINISHED || st->state == CSTATE_ABORTED)
remains--;
diff --git a/src/include/pg_config_manual.h b/src/include/pg_config_manual.h
index d27c8601fa..e3d2e751ea 100644
--- a/src/include/pg_config_manual.h
+++ b/src/include/pg_config_manual.h
@@ -21,7 +21,7 @@
/*
* Maximum length for identifiers (e.g. table names, column names,
- * function names). Names actually are limited to one less byte than this,
+ * function names). Names actually are limited to one fewer byte than this,
* because the length must include a trailing zero byte.
*
* Changing this requires an initdb.
@@ -87,7 +87,7 @@
/*
* MAXPGPATH: standard size of a pathname buffer in PostgreSQL (hence,
- * maximum usable pathname length is one less).
+ * maximum usable pathname length is one fewer).
*
* We'd use a standard system header symbol for this, if there weren't
* so many to choose from: MAXPATHLEN, MAX_PATH, PATH_MAX are all
diff --git a/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h b/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h
index 67d3c7b4e4..9e73f1f1b1 100644
--- a/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h
+++ b/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h
@@ -7,7 +7,7 @@
/*
* Maximum length for identifiers (e.g. table names, column names,
- * function names). Names actually are limited to one less byte than this,
+ * function names). Names actually are limited to one fewer byte than this,
* because the length must include a trailing zero byte.
*
* This should be at least as much as NAMEDATALEN of the database the
diff --git a/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out b/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out
index 84f7eabb66..9799cfbdbd 100644
--- a/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out
+++ b/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out
@@ -4325,7 +4325,7 @@ SELECT f1, polygon(8, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
<(100,1),115> | ((-15,1),(18.6827201635,82.3172798365),(100,116),(181.317279836,82.3172798365),(215,1),(181.317279836,-80.3172798365),(100,-114),(18.6827201635,-80.3172798365))
(6 rows)
--- Too less points error
+-- Too few points error
SELECT f1, polygon(1, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
ERROR: must request at least 2 points
-- Zero radius error
diff --git a/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql b/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql
index 96df0ab05a..b0ab6d03ec 100644
--- a/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql
+++ b/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql
@@ -424,7 +424,7 @@ SELECT f1, f1::polygon FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
-- To polygon with less points
SELECT f1, polygon(8, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
--- Too less points error
+-- Too few points error
SELECT f1, polygon(1, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
-- Zero radius error
--
2.17.0
--lc9FT7cWel8HagAv
Content-Type: text/x-diff; charset=us-ascii
Content-Disposition: attachment;
filename="0007-function-comment-get_am_name.patch"
^ permalink raw reply [nested|flat] 25+ messages in thread
* [PATCH 06/18] One fewer (not one less)
@ 2021-01-18 20:37 Justin Pryzby <[email protected]>
0 siblings, 0 replies; 25+ messages in thread
From: Justin Pryzby @ 2021-01-18 20:37 UTC (permalink / raw)
---
contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c | 2 +-
doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml | 2 +-
doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml | 2 +-
doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml | 2 +-
src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c | 4 ++--
src/backend/commands/analyze.c | 2 +-
src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c | 2 +-
src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c | 2 +-
src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c | 2 +-
src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c | 2 +-
src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c | 2 +-
src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c | 2 +-
src/include/pg_config_manual.h | 4 ++--
src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h | 2 +-
src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out | 2 +-
src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql | 2 +-
16 files changed, 18 insertions(+), 18 deletions(-)
diff --git a/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c b/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c
index 9abcee32af..f6760eb31e 100644
--- a/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c
+++ b/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c
@@ -338,7 +338,7 @@ tuple_data_split_internal(Oid relid, char *tupdata,
attr = TupleDescAttr(tupdesc, i);
/*
- * Tuple header can specify less attributes than tuple descriptor as
+ * Tuple header can specify fewer attributes than tuple descriptor as
* ALTER TABLE ADD COLUMN without DEFAULT keyword does not actually
* change tuples in pages, so attributes with numbers greater than
* (t_infomask2 & HEAP_NATTS_MASK) should be treated as NULL.
diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml
index cebc09ef91..1b00e543a6 100644
--- a/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml
+++ b/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml
@@ -619,7 +619,7 @@ SELECT * FROM test1 ORDER BY a || b COLLATE "fr_FR";
name such as <literal>de_DE</literal> can be considered unique
within a given database even though it would not be unique globally.
Use of the stripped collation names is recommended, since it will
- make one less thing you need to change if you decide to change to
+ make one fewer thing you need to change if you decide to change to
another database encoding. Note however that the <literal>default</literal>,
<literal>C</literal>, and <literal>POSIX</literal> collations can be used regardless of
the database encoding.
diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml
index 0b24a55505..693423e524 100644
--- a/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml
+++ b/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml
@@ -867,7 +867,7 @@ CREATE TYPE <replaceable class="parameter">name</replaceable>
Before <productname>PostgreSQL</productname> version 8.3, the name of
a generated array type was always exactly the element type's name with one
underscore character (<literal>_</literal>) prepended. (Type names were
- therefore restricted in length to one less character than other names.)
+ therefore restricted in length to one fewer character than other names.)
While this is still usually the case, the array type name may vary from
this in case of maximum-length names or collisions with user type names
that begin with underscore. Writing code that depends on this convention
diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml
index e81addcfa9..aa172d102b 100644
--- a/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml
+++ b/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml
@@ -1266,7 +1266,7 @@ CREATE [ OR REPLACE ] RULE <replaceable class="parameter">name</replaceable> AS
<para>
The query trees generated from rule actions are thrown into the
rewrite system again, and maybe more rules get applied resulting
- in more or less query trees.
+ in additional or fewer query trees.
So a rule's actions must have either a different
command type or a different result relation than the rule itself is
on, otherwise this recursive process will end up in an infinite loop.
diff --git a/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c b/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c
index 24a27e387d..0b56b0fa5a 100644
--- a/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c
+++ b/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c
@@ -719,11 +719,11 @@ heap_copytuple_with_tuple(HeapTuple src, HeapTuple dest)
}
/*
- * Expand a tuple which has less attributes than required. For each attribute
+ * Expand a tuple which has fewer attributes than required. For each attribute
* not present in the sourceTuple, if there is a missing value that will be
* used. Otherwise the attribute will be set to NULL.
*
- * The source tuple must have less attributes than the required number.
+ * The source tuple must have fewer attributes than the required number.
*
* Only one of targetHeapTuple and targetMinimalTuple may be supplied. The
* other argument must be NULL.
diff --git a/src/backend/commands/analyze.c b/src/backend/commands/analyze.c
index 7295cf0215..64908ac39c 100644
--- a/src/backend/commands/analyze.c
+++ b/src/backend/commands/analyze.c
@@ -1003,7 +1003,7 @@ examine_attribute(Relation onerel, int attnum, Node *index_expr)
* As of May 2004 we use a new two-stage method: Stage one selects up
* to targrows random blocks (or all blocks, if there aren't so many).
* Stage two scans these blocks and uses the Vitter algorithm to create
- * a random sample of targrows rows (or less, if there are less in the
+ * a random sample of targrows rows (or fewer, if there are fewer in the
* sample of blocks). The two stages are executed simultaneously: each
* block is processed as soon as stage one returns its number and while
* the rows are read stage two controls which ones are to be inserted
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c b/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c
index 4d185c27b4..078aaef539 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c
@@ -263,7 +263,7 @@ static int compareDatetime(Datum val1, Oid typid1, Datum val2, Oid typid2,
* implement @? and @@ operators, which in turn are intended to have an
* index support. Thus, it's desirable to make it easier to achieve
* consistency between index scan results and sequential scan results.
- * So, we throw as less errors as possible. Regarding this function,
+ * So, we throw as few errors as possible. Regarding this function,
* such behavior also matches behavior of JSON_EXISTS() clause of
* SQL/JSON. Regarding jsonb_path_match(), this function doesn't have
* an analogy in SQL/JSON, so we define its behavior on our own.
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c b/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c
index 47ca4ddbb5..52314d3aa1 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c
@@ -645,7 +645,7 @@ scalarineqsel(PlannerInfo *root, Oid operator, bool isgt, bool iseq,
/*
* The calculation so far gave us a selectivity for the "<=" case.
- * We'll have one less tuple for "<" and one additional tuple for
+ * We'll have one fewer tuple for "<" and one additional tuple for
* ">=", the latter of which we'll reverse the selectivity for
* below, so we can simply subtract one tuple for both cases. The
* cases that need this adjustment can be identified by iseq being
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c b/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c
index fa2b49c676..55c9445898 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c
@@ -1497,7 +1497,7 @@ GetCatCacheHashValue(CatCache *cache,
* It doesn't make any sense to specify all of the cache's key columns
* here: since the key is unique, there could be at most one match, so
* you ought to use SearchCatCache() instead. Hence this function takes
- * one less Datum argument than SearchCatCache() does.
+ * one fewer Datum argument than SearchCatCache() does.
*
* The caller must not modify the list object or the pointed-to tuples,
* and must call ReleaseCatCacheList() when done with the list.
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c b/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c
index 0c327e823f..7348b86682 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c
@@ -42,7 +42,7 @@ BlockSampler_Init(BlockSampler bs, BlockNumber nblocks, int samplesize,
bs->N = nblocks; /* measured table size */
/*
- * If we decide to reduce samplesize for tables that have less or not much
+ * If we decide to reduce samplesize for tables that have fewer or not much
* more than samplesize blocks, here is the place to do it.
*/
bs->n = samplesize;
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c b/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c
index e4ee1aab97..10a1effb74 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c
@@ -495,7 +495,7 @@ FreePageManagerDump(FreePageManager *fpm)
* if we search the parent page for the first key greater than or equal to
* the first key on the current page, the downlink to this page will be either
* the exact index returned by the search (if the first key decreased)
- * or one less (if the first key increased).
+ * or one fewer (if the first key increased).
*/
static void
FreePageBtreeAdjustAncestorKeys(FreePageManager *fpm, FreePageBtree *btp)
diff --git a/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c b/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c
index a4a3f40048..627a244fb7 100644
--- a/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c
+++ b/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c
@@ -6458,7 +6458,7 @@ threadRun(void *arg)
/*
* If advanceConnectionState changed client to finished state,
- * that's one less client that remains.
+ * that's one fewer client that remains.
*/
if (st->state == CSTATE_FINISHED || st->state == CSTATE_ABORTED)
remains--;
diff --git a/src/include/pg_config_manual.h b/src/include/pg_config_manual.h
index d27c8601fa..e3d2e751ea 100644
--- a/src/include/pg_config_manual.h
+++ b/src/include/pg_config_manual.h
@@ -21,7 +21,7 @@
/*
* Maximum length for identifiers (e.g. table names, column names,
- * function names). Names actually are limited to one less byte than this,
+ * function names). Names actually are limited to one fewer byte than this,
* because the length must include a trailing zero byte.
*
* Changing this requires an initdb.
@@ -87,7 +87,7 @@
/*
* MAXPGPATH: standard size of a pathname buffer in PostgreSQL (hence,
- * maximum usable pathname length is one less).
+ * maximum usable pathname length is one fewer).
*
* We'd use a standard system header symbol for this, if there weren't
* so many to choose from: MAXPATHLEN, MAX_PATH, PATH_MAX are all
diff --git a/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h b/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h
index 67d3c7b4e4..9e73f1f1b1 100644
--- a/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h
+++ b/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h
@@ -7,7 +7,7 @@
/*
* Maximum length for identifiers (e.g. table names, column names,
- * function names). Names actually are limited to one less byte than this,
+ * function names). Names actually are limited to one fewer byte than this,
* because the length must include a trailing zero byte.
*
* This should be at least as much as NAMEDATALEN of the database the
diff --git a/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out b/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out
index 84f7eabb66..9799cfbdbd 100644
--- a/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out
+++ b/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out
@@ -4325,7 +4325,7 @@ SELECT f1, polygon(8, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
<(100,1),115> | ((-15,1),(18.6827201635,82.3172798365),(100,116),(181.317279836,82.3172798365),(215,1),(181.317279836,-80.3172798365),(100,-114),(18.6827201635,-80.3172798365))
(6 rows)
--- Too less points error
+-- Too few points error
SELECT f1, polygon(1, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
ERROR: must request at least 2 points
-- Zero radius error
diff --git a/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql b/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql
index 96df0ab05a..b0ab6d03ec 100644
--- a/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql
+++ b/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql
@@ -424,7 +424,7 @@ SELECT f1, f1::polygon FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
-- To polygon with less points
SELECT f1, polygon(8, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
--- Too less points error
+-- Too few points error
SELECT f1, polygon(1, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
-- Zero radius error
--
2.17.0
--lc9FT7cWel8HagAv
Content-Type: text/x-diff; charset=us-ascii
Content-Disposition: attachment;
filename="0007-function-comment-get_am_name.patch"
^ permalink raw reply [nested|flat] 25+ messages in thread
* [PATCH 06/18] One fewer (not one less)
@ 2021-01-18 20:37 Justin Pryzby <[email protected]>
0 siblings, 0 replies; 25+ messages in thread
From: Justin Pryzby @ 2021-01-18 20:37 UTC (permalink / raw)
---
contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c | 2 +-
doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml | 2 +-
doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml | 2 +-
doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml | 2 +-
src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c | 4 ++--
src/backend/commands/analyze.c | 2 +-
src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c | 2 +-
src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c | 2 +-
src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c | 2 +-
src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c | 2 +-
src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c | 2 +-
src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c | 2 +-
src/include/pg_config_manual.h | 4 ++--
src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h | 2 +-
src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out | 2 +-
src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql | 2 +-
16 files changed, 18 insertions(+), 18 deletions(-)
diff --git a/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c b/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c
index 9abcee32af..f6760eb31e 100644
--- a/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c
+++ b/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c
@@ -338,7 +338,7 @@ tuple_data_split_internal(Oid relid, char *tupdata,
attr = TupleDescAttr(tupdesc, i);
/*
- * Tuple header can specify less attributes than tuple descriptor as
+ * Tuple header can specify fewer attributes than tuple descriptor as
* ALTER TABLE ADD COLUMN without DEFAULT keyword does not actually
* change tuples in pages, so attributes with numbers greater than
* (t_infomask2 & HEAP_NATTS_MASK) should be treated as NULL.
diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml
index cebc09ef91..1b00e543a6 100644
--- a/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml
+++ b/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml
@@ -619,7 +619,7 @@ SELECT * FROM test1 ORDER BY a || b COLLATE "fr_FR";
name such as <literal>de_DE</literal> can be considered unique
within a given database even though it would not be unique globally.
Use of the stripped collation names is recommended, since it will
- make one less thing you need to change if you decide to change to
+ make one fewer thing you need to change if you decide to change to
another database encoding. Note however that the <literal>default</literal>,
<literal>C</literal>, and <literal>POSIX</literal> collations can be used regardless of
the database encoding.
diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml
index 0b24a55505..693423e524 100644
--- a/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml
+++ b/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml
@@ -867,7 +867,7 @@ CREATE TYPE <replaceable class="parameter">name</replaceable>
Before <productname>PostgreSQL</productname> version 8.3, the name of
a generated array type was always exactly the element type's name with one
underscore character (<literal>_</literal>) prepended. (Type names were
- therefore restricted in length to one less character than other names.)
+ therefore restricted in length to one fewer character than other names.)
While this is still usually the case, the array type name may vary from
this in case of maximum-length names or collisions with user type names
that begin with underscore. Writing code that depends on this convention
diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml
index e81addcfa9..aa172d102b 100644
--- a/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml
+++ b/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml
@@ -1266,7 +1266,7 @@ CREATE [ OR REPLACE ] RULE <replaceable class="parameter">name</replaceable> AS
<para>
The query trees generated from rule actions are thrown into the
rewrite system again, and maybe more rules get applied resulting
- in more or less query trees.
+ in additional or fewer query trees.
So a rule's actions must have either a different
command type or a different result relation than the rule itself is
on, otherwise this recursive process will end up in an infinite loop.
diff --git a/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c b/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c
index 24a27e387d..0b56b0fa5a 100644
--- a/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c
+++ b/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c
@@ -719,11 +719,11 @@ heap_copytuple_with_tuple(HeapTuple src, HeapTuple dest)
}
/*
- * Expand a tuple which has less attributes than required. For each attribute
+ * Expand a tuple which has fewer attributes than required. For each attribute
* not present in the sourceTuple, if there is a missing value that will be
* used. Otherwise the attribute will be set to NULL.
*
- * The source tuple must have less attributes than the required number.
+ * The source tuple must have fewer attributes than the required number.
*
* Only one of targetHeapTuple and targetMinimalTuple may be supplied. The
* other argument must be NULL.
diff --git a/src/backend/commands/analyze.c b/src/backend/commands/analyze.c
index 7295cf0215..64908ac39c 100644
--- a/src/backend/commands/analyze.c
+++ b/src/backend/commands/analyze.c
@@ -1003,7 +1003,7 @@ examine_attribute(Relation onerel, int attnum, Node *index_expr)
* As of May 2004 we use a new two-stage method: Stage one selects up
* to targrows random blocks (or all blocks, if there aren't so many).
* Stage two scans these blocks and uses the Vitter algorithm to create
- * a random sample of targrows rows (or less, if there are less in the
+ * a random sample of targrows rows (or fewer, if there are fewer in the
* sample of blocks). The two stages are executed simultaneously: each
* block is processed as soon as stage one returns its number and while
* the rows are read stage two controls which ones are to be inserted
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c b/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c
index 4d185c27b4..078aaef539 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c
@@ -263,7 +263,7 @@ static int compareDatetime(Datum val1, Oid typid1, Datum val2, Oid typid2,
* implement @? and @@ operators, which in turn are intended to have an
* index support. Thus, it's desirable to make it easier to achieve
* consistency between index scan results and sequential scan results.
- * So, we throw as less errors as possible. Regarding this function,
+ * So, we throw as few errors as possible. Regarding this function,
* such behavior also matches behavior of JSON_EXISTS() clause of
* SQL/JSON. Regarding jsonb_path_match(), this function doesn't have
* an analogy in SQL/JSON, so we define its behavior on our own.
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c b/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c
index 47ca4ddbb5..52314d3aa1 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c
@@ -645,7 +645,7 @@ scalarineqsel(PlannerInfo *root, Oid operator, bool isgt, bool iseq,
/*
* The calculation so far gave us a selectivity for the "<=" case.
- * We'll have one less tuple for "<" and one additional tuple for
+ * We'll have one fewer tuple for "<" and one additional tuple for
* ">=", the latter of which we'll reverse the selectivity for
* below, so we can simply subtract one tuple for both cases. The
* cases that need this adjustment can be identified by iseq being
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c b/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c
index fa2b49c676..55c9445898 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c
@@ -1497,7 +1497,7 @@ GetCatCacheHashValue(CatCache *cache,
* It doesn't make any sense to specify all of the cache's key columns
* here: since the key is unique, there could be at most one match, so
* you ought to use SearchCatCache() instead. Hence this function takes
- * one less Datum argument than SearchCatCache() does.
+ * one fewer Datum argument than SearchCatCache() does.
*
* The caller must not modify the list object or the pointed-to tuples,
* and must call ReleaseCatCacheList() when done with the list.
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c b/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c
index 0c327e823f..7348b86682 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c
@@ -42,7 +42,7 @@ BlockSampler_Init(BlockSampler bs, BlockNumber nblocks, int samplesize,
bs->N = nblocks; /* measured table size */
/*
- * If we decide to reduce samplesize for tables that have less or not much
+ * If we decide to reduce samplesize for tables that have fewer or not much
* more than samplesize blocks, here is the place to do it.
*/
bs->n = samplesize;
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c b/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c
index e4ee1aab97..10a1effb74 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c
@@ -495,7 +495,7 @@ FreePageManagerDump(FreePageManager *fpm)
* if we search the parent page for the first key greater than or equal to
* the first key on the current page, the downlink to this page will be either
* the exact index returned by the search (if the first key decreased)
- * or one less (if the first key increased).
+ * or one fewer (if the first key increased).
*/
static void
FreePageBtreeAdjustAncestorKeys(FreePageManager *fpm, FreePageBtree *btp)
diff --git a/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c b/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c
index a4a3f40048..627a244fb7 100644
--- a/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c
+++ b/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c
@@ -6458,7 +6458,7 @@ threadRun(void *arg)
/*
* If advanceConnectionState changed client to finished state,
- * that's one less client that remains.
+ * that's one fewer client that remains.
*/
if (st->state == CSTATE_FINISHED || st->state == CSTATE_ABORTED)
remains--;
diff --git a/src/include/pg_config_manual.h b/src/include/pg_config_manual.h
index d27c8601fa..e3d2e751ea 100644
--- a/src/include/pg_config_manual.h
+++ b/src/include/pg_config_manual.h
@@ -21,7 +21,7 @@
/*
* Maximum length for identifiers (e.g. table names, column names,
- * function names). Names actually are limited to one less byte than this,
+ * function names). Names actually are limited to one fewer byte than this,
* because the length must include a trailing zero byte.
*
* Changing this requires an initdb.
@@ -87,7 +87,7 @@
/*
* MAXPGPATH: standard size of a pathname buffer in PostgreSQL (hence,
- * maximum usable pathname length is one less).
+ * maximum usable pathname length is one fewer).
*
* We'd use a standard system header symbol for this, if there weren't
* so many to choose from: MAXPATHLEN, MAX_PATH, PATH_MAX are all
diff --git a/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h b/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h
index 67d3c7b4e4..9e73f1f1b1 100644
--- a/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h
+++ b/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h
@@ -7,7 +7,7 @@
/*
* Maximum length for identifiers (e.g. table names, column names,
- * function names). Names actually are limited to one less byte than this,
+ * function names). Names actually are limited to one fewer byte than this,
* because the length must include a trailing zero byte.
*
* This should be at least as much as NAMEDATALEN of the database the
diff --git a/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out b/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out
index 84f7eabb66..9799cfbdbd 100644
--- a/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out
+++ b/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out
@@ -4325,7 +4325,7 @@ SELECT f1, polygon(8, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
<(100,1),115> | ((-15,1),(18.6827201635,82.3172798365),(100,116),(181.317279836,82.3172798365),(215,1),(181.317279836,-80.3172798365),(100,-114),(18.6827201635,-80.3172798365))
(6 rows)
--- Too less points error
+-- Too few points error
SELECT f1, polygon(1, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
ERROR: must request at least 2 points
-- Zero radius error
diff --git a/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql b/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql
index 96df0ab05a..b0ab6d03ec 100644
--- a/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql
+++ b/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql
@@ -424,7 +424,7 @@ SELECT f1, f1::polygon FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
-- To polygon with less points
SELECT f1, polygon(8, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
--- Too less points error
+-- Too few points error
SELECT f1, polygon(1, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
-- Zero radius error
--
2.17.0
--lc9FT7cWel8HagAv
Content-Type: text/x-diff; charset=us-ascii
Content-Disposition: attachment;
filename="0007-function-comment-get_am_name.patch"
^ permalink raw reply [nested|flat] 25+ messages in thread
* [PATCH 06/18] One fewer (not one less)
@ 2021-01-18 20:37 Justin Pryzby <[email protected]>
0 siblings, 0 replies; 25+ messages in thread
From: Justin Pryzby @ 2021-01-18 20:37 UTC (permalink / raw)
---
contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c | 2 +-
doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml | 2 +-
doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml | 2 +-
doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml | 2 +-
src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c | 4 ++--
src/backend/commands/analyze.c | 2 +-
src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c | 2 +-
src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c | 2 +-
src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c | 2 +-
src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c | 2 +-
src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c | 2 +-
src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c | 2 +-
src/include/pg_config_manual.h | 4 ++--
src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h | 2 +-
src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out | 2 +-
src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql | 2 +-
16 files changed, 18 insertions(+), 18 deletions(-)
diff --git a/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c b/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c
index 9abcee32af..f6760eb31e 100644
--- a/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c
+++ b/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c
@@ -338,7 +338,7 @@ tuple_data_split_internal(Oid relid, char *tupdata,
attr = TupleDescAttr(tupdesc, i);
/*
- * Tuple header can specify less attributes than tuple descriptor as
+ * Tuple header can specify fewer attributes than tuple descriptor as
* ALTER TABLE ADD COLUMN without DEFAULT keyword does not actually
* change tuples in pages, so attributes with numbers greater than
* (t_infomask2 & HEAP_NATTS_MASK) should be treated as NULL.
diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml
index cebc09ef91..1b00e543a6 100644
--- a/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml
+++ b/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml
@@ -619,7 +619,7 @@ SELECT * FROM test1 ORDER BY a || b COLLATE "fr_FR";
name such as <literal>de_DE</literal> can be considered unique
within a given database even though it would not be unique globally.
Use of the stripped collation names is recommended, since it will
- make one less thing you need to change if you decide to change to
+ make one fewer thing you need to change if you decide to change to
another database encoding. Note however that the <literal>default</literal>,
<literal>C</literal>, and <literal>POSIX</literal> collations can be used regardless of
the database encoding.
diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml
index 0b24a55505..693423e524 100644
--- a/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml
+++ b/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml
@@ -867,7 +867,7 @@ CREATE TYPE <replaceable class="parameter">name</replaceable>
Before <productname>PostgreSQL</productname> version 8.3, the name of
a generated array type was always exactly the element type's name with one
underscore character (<literal>_</literal>) prepended. (Type names were
- therefore restricted in length to one less character than other names.)
+ therefore restricted in length to one fewer character than other names.)
While this is still usually the case, the array type name may vary from
this in case of maximum-length names or collisions with user type names
that begin with underscore. Writing code that depends on this convention
diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml
index e81addcfa9..aa172d102b 100644
--- a/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml
+++ b/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml
@@ -1266,7 +1266,7 @@ CREATE [ OR REPLACE ] RULE <replaceable class="parameter">name</replaceable> AS
<para>
The query trees generated from rule actions are thrown into the
rewrite system again, and maybe more rules get applied resulting
- in more or less query trees.
+ in additional or fewer query trees.
So a rule's actions must have either a different
command type or a different result relation than the rule itself is
on, otherwise this recursive process will end up in an infinite loop.
diff --git a/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c b/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c
index 24a27e387d..0b56b0fa5a 100644
--- a/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c
+++ b/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c
@@ -719,11 +719,11 @@ heap_copytuple_with_tuple(HeapTuple src, HeapTuple dest)
}
/*
- * Expand a tuple which has less attributes than required. For each attribute
+ * Expand a tuple which has fewer attributes than required. For each attribute
* not present in the sourceTuple, if there is a missing value that will be
* used. Otherwise the attribute will be set to NULL.
*
- * The source tuple must have less attributes than the required number.
+ * The source tuple must have fewer attributes than the required number.
*
* Only one of targetHeapTuple and targetMinimalTuple may be supplied. The
* other argument must be NULL.
diff --git a/src/backend/commands/analyze.c b/src/backend/commands/analyze.c
index 7295cf0215..64908ac39c 100644
--- a/src/backend/commands/analyze.c
+++ b/src/backend/commands/analyze.c
@@ -1003,7 +1003,7 @@ examine_attribute(Relation onerel, int attnum, Node *index_expr)
* As of May 2004 we use a new two-stage method: Stage one selects up
* to targrows random blocks (or all blocks, if there aren't so many).
* Stage two scans these blocks and uses the Vitter algorithm to create
- * a random sample of targrows rows (or less, if there are less in the
+ * a random sample of targrows rows (or fewer, if there are fewer in the
* sample of blocks). The two stages are executed simultaneously: each
* block is processed as soon as stage one returns its number and while
* the rows are read stage two controls which ones are to be inserted
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c b/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c
index 4d185c27b4..078aaef539 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c
@@ -263,7 +263,7 @@ static int compareDatetime(Datum val1, Oid typid1, Datum val2, Oid typid2,
* implement @? and @@ operators, which in turn are intended to have an
* index support. Thus, it's desirable to make it easier to achieve
* consistency between index scan results and sequential scan results.
- * So, we throw as less errors as possible. Regarding this function,
+ * So, we throw as few errors as possible. Regarding this function,
* such behavior also matches behavior of JSON_EXISTS() clause of
* SQL/JSON. Regarding jsonb_path_match(), this function doesn't have
* an analogy in SQL/JSON, so we define its behavior on our own.
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c b/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c
index 47ca4ddbb5..52314d3aa1 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c
@@ -645,7 +645,7 @@ scalarineqsel(PlannerInfo *root, Oid operator, bool isgt, bool iseq,
/*
* The calculation so far gave us a selectivity for the "<=" case.
- * We'll have one less tuple for "<" and one additional tuple for
+ * We'll have one fewer tuple for "<" and one additional tuple for
* ">=", the latter of which we'll reverse the selectivity for
* below, so we can simply subtract one tuple for both cases. The
* cases that need this adjustment can be identified by iseq being
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c b/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c
index fa2b49c676..55c9445898 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c
@@ -1497,7 +1497,7 @@ GetCatCacheHashValue(CatCache *cache,
* It doesn't make any sense to specify all of the cache's key columns
* here: since the key is unique, there could be at most one match, so
* you ought to use SearchCatCache() instead. Hence this function takes
- * one less Datum argument than SearchCatCache() does.
+ * one fewer Datum argument than SearchCatCache() does.
*
* The caller must not modify the list object or the pointed-to tuples,
* and must call ReleaseCatCacheList() when done with the list.
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c b/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c
index 0c327e823f..7348b86682 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c
@@ -42,7 +42,7 @@ BlockSampler_Init(BlockSampler bs, BlockNumber nblocks, int samplesize,
bs->N = nblocks; /* measured table size */
/*
- * If we decide to reduce samplesize for tables that have less or not much
+ * If we decide to reduce samplesize for tables that have fewer or not much
* more than samplesize blocks, here is the place to do it.
*/
bs->n = samplesize;
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c b/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c
index e4ee1aab97..10a1effb74 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c
@@ -495,7 +495,7 @@ FreePageManagerDump(FreePageManager *fpm)
* if we search the parent page for the first key greater than or equal to
* the first key on the current page, the downlink to this page will be either
* the exact index returned by the search (if the first key decreased)
- * or one less (if the first key increased).
+ * or one fewer (if the first key increased).
*/
static void
FreePageBtreeAdjustAncestorKeys(FreePageManager *fpm, FreePageBtree *btp)
diff --git a/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c b/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c
index a4a3f40048..627a244fb7 100644
--- a/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c
+++ b/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c
@@ -6458,7 +6458,7 @@ threadRun(void *arg)
/*
* If advanceConnectionState changed client to finished state,
- * that's one less client that remains.
+ * that's one fewer client that remains.
*/
if (st->state == CSTATE_FINISHED || st->state == CSTATE_ABORTED)
remains--;
diff --git a/src/include/pg_config_manual.h b/src/include/pg_config_manual.h
index d27c8601fa..e3d2e751ea 100644
--- a/src/include/pg_config_manual.h
+++ b/src/include/pg_config_manual.h
@@ -21,7 +21,7 @@
/*
* Maximum length for identifiers (e.g. table names, column names,
- * function names). Names actually are limited to one less byte than this,
+ * function names). Names actually are limited to one fewer byte than this,
* because the length must include a trailing zero byte.
*
* Changing this requires an initdb.
@@ -87,7 +87,7 @@
/*
* MAXPGPATH: standard size of a pathname buffer in PostgreSQL (hence,
- * maximum usable pathname length is one less).
+ * maximum usable pathname length is one fewer).
*
* We'd use a standard system header symbol for this, if there weren't
* so many to choose from: MAXPATHLEN, MAX_PATH, PATH_MAX are all
diff --git a/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h b/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h
index 67d3c7b4e4..9e73f1f1b1 100644
--- a/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h
+++ b/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h
@@ -7,7 +7,7 @@
/*
* Maximum length for identifiers (e.g. table names, column names,
- * function names). Names actually are limited to one less byte than this,
+ * function names). Names actually are limited to one fewer byte than this,
* because the length must include a trailing zero byte.
*
* This should be at least as much as NAMEDATALEN of the database the
diff --git a/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out b/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out
index 84f7eabb66..9799cfbdbd 100644
--- a/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out
+++ b/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out
@@ -4325,7 +4325,7 @@ SELECT f1, polygon(8, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
<(100,1),115> | ((-15,1),(18.6827201635,82.3172798365),(100,116),(181.317279836,82.3172798365),(215,1),(181.317279836,-80.3172798365),(100,-114),(18.6827201635,-80.3172798365))
(6 rows)
--- Too less points error
+-- Too few points error
SELECT f1, polygon(1, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
ERROR: must request at least 2 points
-- Zero radius error
diff --git a/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql b/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql
index 96df0ab05a..b0ab6d03ec 100644
--- a/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql
+++ b/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql
@@ -424,7 +424,7 @@ SELECT f1, f1::polygon FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
-- To polygon with less points
SELECT f1, polygon(8, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
--- Too less points error
+-- Too few points error
SELECT f1, polygon(1, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
-- Zero radius error
--
2.17.0
--lc9FT7cWel8HagAv
Content-Type: text/x-diff; charset=us-ascii
Content-Disposition: attachment;
filename="0007-function-comment-get_am_name.patch"
^ permalink raw reply [nested|flat] 25+ messages in thread
* [PATCH 06/18] One fewer (not one less)
@ 2021-01-18 20:37 Justin Pryzby <[email protected]>
0 siblings, 0 replies; 25+ messages in thread
From: Justin Pryzby @ 2021-01-18 20:37 UTC (permalink / raw)
---
contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c | 2 +-
doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml | 2 +-
doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml | 2 +-
doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml | 2 +-
src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c | 4 ++--
src/backend/commands/analyze.c | 2 +-
src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c | 2 +-
src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c | 2 +-
src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c | 2 +-
src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c | 2 +-
src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c | 2 +-
src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c | 2 +-
src/include/pg_config_manual.h | 4 ++--
src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h | 2 +-
src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out | 2 +-
src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql | 2 +-
16 files changed, 18 insertions(+), 18 deletions(-)
diff --git a/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c b/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c
index 9abcee32af..f6760eb31e 100644
--- a/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c
+++ b/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c
@@ -338,7 +338,7 @@ tuple_data_split_internal(Oid relid, char *tupdata,
attr = TupleDescAttr(tupdesc, i);
/*
- * Tuple header can specify less attributes than tuple descriptor as
+ * Tuple header can specify fewer attributes than tuple descriptor as
* ALTER TABLE ADD COLUMN without DEFAULT keyword does not actually
* change tuples in pages, so attributes with numbers greater than
* (t_infomask2 & HEAP_NATTS_MASK) should be treated as NULL.
diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml
index cebc09ef91..1b00e543a6 100644
--- a/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml
+++ b/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml
@@ -619,7 +619,7 @@ SELECT * FROM test1 ORDER BY a || b COLLATE "fr_FR";
name such as <literal>de_DE</literal> can be considered unique
within a given database even though it would not be unique globally.
Use of the stripped collation names is recommended, since it will
- make one less thing you need to change if you decide to change to
+ make one fewer thing you need to change if you decide to change to
another database encoding. Note however that the <literal>default</literal>,
<literal>C</literal>, and <literal>POSIX</literal> collations can be used regardless of
the database encoding.
diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml
index 0b24a55505..693423e524 100644
--- a/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml
+++ b/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml
@@ -867,7 +867,7 @@ CREATE TYPE <replaceable class="parameter">name</replaceable>
Before <productname>PostgreSQL</productname> version 8.3, the name of
a generated array type was always exactly the element type's name with one
underscore character (<literal>_</literal>) prepended. (Type names were
- therefore restricted in length to one less character than other names.)
+ therefore restricted in length to one fewer character than other names.)
While this is still usually the case, the array type name may vary from
this in case of maximum-length names or collisions with user type names
that begin with underscore. Writing code that depends on this convention
diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml
index e81addcfa9..aa172d102b 100644
--- a/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml
+++ b/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml
@@ -1266,7 +1266,7 @@ CREATE [ OR REPLACE ] RULE <replaceable class="parameter">name</replaceable> AS
<para>
The query trees generated from rule actions are thrown into the
rewrite system again, and maybe more rules get applied resulting
- in more or less query trees.
+ in additional or fewer query trees.
So a rule's actions must have either a different
command type or a different result relation than the rule itself is
on, otherwise this recursive process will end up in an infinite loop.
diff --git a/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c b/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c
index 24a27e387d..0b56b0fa5a 100644
--- a/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c
+++ b/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c
@@ -719,11 +719,11 @@ heap_copytuple_with_tuple(HeapTuple src, HeapTuple dest)
}
/*
- * Expand a tuple which has less attributes than required. For each attribute
+ * Expand a tuple which has fewer attributes than required. For each attribute
* not present in the sourceTuple, if there is a missing value that will be
* used. Otherwise the attribute will be set to NULL.
*
- * The source tuple must have less attributes than the required number.
+ * The source tuple must have fewer attributes than the required number.
*
* Only one of targetHeapTuple and targetMinimalTuple may be supplied. The
* other argument must be NULL.
diff --git a/src/backend/commands/analyze.c b/src/backend/commands/analyze.c
index 7295cf0215..64908ac39c 100644
--- a/src/backend/commands/analyze.c
+++ b/src/backend/commands/analyze.c
@@ -1003,7 +1003,7 @@ examine_attribute(Relation onerel, int attnum, Node *index_expr)
* As of May 2004 we use a new two-stage method: Stage one selects up
* to targrows random blocks (or all blocks, if there aren't so many).
* Stage two scans these blocks and uses the Vitter algorithm to create
- * a random sample of targrows rows (or less, if there are less in the
+ * a random sample of targrows rows (or fewer, if there are fewer in the
* sample of blocks). The two stages are executed simultaneously: each
* block is processed as soon as stage one returns its number and while
* the rows are read stage two controls which ones are to be inserted
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c b/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c
index 4d185c27b4..078aaef539 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c
@@ -263,7 +263,7 @@ static int compareDatetime(Datum val1, Oid typid1, Datum val2, Oid typid2,
* implement @? and @@ operators, which in turn are intended to have an
* index support. Thus, it's desirable to make it easier to achieve
* consistency between index scan results and sequential scan results.
- * So, we throw as less errors as possible. Regarding this function,
+ * So, we throw as few errors as possible. Regarding this function,
* such behavior also matches behavior of JSON_EXISTS() clause of
* SQL/JSON. Regarding jsonb_path_match(), this function doesn't have
* an analogy in SQL/JSON, so we define its behavior on our own.
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c b/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c
index 47ca4ddbb5..52314d3aa1 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c
@@ -645,7 +645,7 @@ scalarineqsel(PlannerInfo *root, Oid operator, bool isgt, bool iseq,
/*
* The calculation so far gave us a selectivity for the "<=" case.
- * We'll have one less tuple for "<" and one additional tuple for
+ * We'll have one fewer tuple for "<" and one additional tuple for
* ">=", the latter of which we'll reverse the selectivity for
* below, so we can simply subtract one tuple for both cases. The
* cases that need this adjustment can be identified by iseq being
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c b/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c
index fa2b49c676..55c9445898 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c
@@ -1497,7 +1497,7 @@ GetCatCacheHashValue(CatCache *cache,
* It doesn't make any sense to specify all of the cache's key columns
* here: since the key is unique, there could be at most one match, so
* you ought to use SearchCatCache() instead. Hence this function takes
- * one less Datum argument than SearchCatCache() does.
+ * one fewer Datum argument than SearchCatCache() does.
*
* The caller must not modify the list object or the pointed-to tuples,
* and must call ReleaseCatCacheList() when done with the list.
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c b/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c
index 0c327e823f..7348b86682 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c
@@ -42,7 +42,7 @@ BlockSampler_Init(BlockSampler bs, BlockNumber nblocks, int samplesize,
bs->N = nblocks; /* measured table size */
/*
- * If we decide to reduce samplesize for tables that have less or not much
+ * If we decide to reduce samplesize for tables that have fewer or not much
* more than samplesize blocks, here is the place to do it.
*/
bs->n = samplesize;
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c b/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c
index e4ee1aab97..10a1effb74 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c
@@ -495,7 +495,7 @@ FreePageManagerDump(FreePageManager *fpm)
* if we search the parent page for the first key greater than or equal to
* the first key on the current page, the downlink to this page will be either
* the exact index returned by the search (if the first key decreased)
- * or one less (if the first key increased).
+ * or one fewer (if the first key increased).
*/
static void
FreePageBtreeAdjustAncestorKeys(FreePageManager *fpm, FreePageBtree *btp)
diff --git a/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c b/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c
index a4a3f40048..627a244fb7 100644
--- a/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c
+++ b/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c
@@ -6458,7 +6458,7 @@ threadRun(void *arg)
/*
* If advanceConnectionState changed client to finished state,
- * that's one less client that remains.
+ * that's one fewer client that remains.
*/
if (st->state == CSTATE_FINISHED || st->state == CSTATE_ABORTED)
remains--;
diff --git a/src/include/pg_config_manual.h b/src/include/pg_config_manual.h
index d27c8601fa..e3d2e751ea 100644
--- a/src/include/pg_config_manual.h
+++ b/src/include/pg_config_manual.h
@@ -21,7 +21,7 @@
/*
* Maximum length for identifiers (e.g. table names, column names,
- * function names). Names actually are limited to one less byte than this,
+ * function names). Names actually are limited to one fewer byte than this,
* because the length must include a trailing zero byte.
*
* Changing this requires an initdb.
@@ -87,7 +87,7 @@
/*
* MAXPGPATH: standard size of a pathname buffer in PostgreSQL (hence,
- * maximum usable pathname length is one less).
+ * maximum usable pathname length is one fewer).
*
* We'd use a standard system header symbol for this, if there weren't
* so many to choose from: MAXPATHLEN, MAX_PATH, PATH_MAX are all
diff --git a/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h b/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h
index 67d3c7b4e4..9e73f1f1b1 100644
--- a/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h
+++ b/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h
@@ -7,7 +7,7 @@
/*
* Maximum length for identifiers (e.g. table names, column names,
- * function names). Names actually are limited to one less byte than this,
+ * function names). Names actually are limited to one fewer byte than this,
* because the length must include a trailing zero byte.
*
* This should be at least as much as NAMEDATALEN of the database the
diff --git a/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out b/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out
index 84f7eabb66..9799cfbdbd 100644
--- a/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out
+++ b/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out
@@ -4325,7 +4325,7 @@ SELECT f1, polygon(8, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
<(100,1),115> | ((-15,1),(18.6827201635,82.3172798365),(100,116),(181.317279836,82.3172798365),(215,1),(181.317279836,-80.3172798365),(100,-114),(18.6827201635,-80.3172798365))
(6 rows)
--- Too less points error
+-- Too few points error
SELECT f1, polygon(1, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
ERROR: must request at least 2 points
-- Zero radius error
diff --git a/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql b/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql
index 96df0ab05a..b0ab6d03ec 100644
--- a/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql
+++ b/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql
@@ -424,7 +424,7 @@ SELECT f1, f1::polygon FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
-- To polygon with less points
SELECT f1, polygon(8, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
--- Too less points error
+-- Too few points error
SELECT f1, polygon(1, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
-- Zero radius error
--
2.17.0
--lc9FT7cWel8HagAv
Content-Type: text/x-diff; charset=us-ascii
Content-Disposition: attachment;
filename="0007-function-comment-get_am_name.patch"
^ permalink raw reply [nested|flat] 25+ messages in thread
* [PATCH 06/18] One fewer (not one less)
@ 2021-01-18 20:37 Justin Pryzby <[email protected]>
0 siblings, 0 replies; 25+ messages in thread
From: Justin Pryzby @ 2021-01-18 20:37 UTC (permalink / raw)
---
contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c | 2 +-
doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml | 2 +-
doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml | 2 +-
doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml | 2 +-
src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c | 4 ++--
src/backend/commands/analyze.c | 2 +-
src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c | 2 +-
src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c | 2 +-
src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c | 2 +-
src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c | 2 +-
src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c | 2 +-
src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c | 2 +-
src/include/pg_config_manual.h | 4 ++--
src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h | 2 +-
src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out | 2 +-
src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql | 2 +-
16 files changed, 18 insertions(+), 18 deletions(-)
diff --git a/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c b/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c
index 9abcee32af..f6760eb31e 100644
--- a/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c
+++ b/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c
@@ -338,7 +338,7 @@ tuple_data_split_internal(Oid relid, char *tupdata,
attr = TupleDescAttr(tupdesc, i);
/*
- * Tuple header can specify less attributes than tuple descriptor as
+ * Tuple header can specify fewer attributes than tuple descriptor as
* ALTER TABLE ADD COLUMN without DEFAULT keyword does not actually
* change tuples in pages, so attributes with numbers greater than
* (t_infomask2 & HEAP_NATTS_MASK) should be treated as NULL.
diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml
index cebc09ef91..1b00e543a6 100644
--- a/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml
+++ b/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml
@@ -619,7 +619,7 @@ SELECT * FROM test1 ORDER BY a || b COLLATE "fr_FR";
name such as <literal>de_DE</literal> can be considered unique
within a given database even though it would not be unique globally.
Use of the stripped collation names is recommended, since it will
- make one less thing you need to change if you decide to change to
+ make one fewer thing you need to change if you decide to change to
another database encoding. Note however that the <literal>default</literal>,
<literal>C</literal>, and <literal>POSIX</literal> collations can be used regardless of
the database encoding.
diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml
index 0b24a55505..693423e524 100644
--- a/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml
+++ b/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml
@@ -867,7 +867,7 @@ CREATE TYPE <replaceable class="parameter">name</replaceable>
Before <productname>PostgreSQL</productname> version 8.3, the name of
a generated array type was always exactly the element type's name with one
underscore character (<literal>_</literal>) prepended. (Type names were
- therefore restricted in length to one less character than other names.)
+ therefore restricted in length to one fewer character than other names.)
While this is still usually the case, the array type name may vary from
this in case of maximum-length names or collisions with user type names
that begin with underscore. Writing code that depends on this convention
diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml
index e81addcfa9..aa172d102b 100644
--- a/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml
+++ b/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml
@@ -1266,7 +1266,7 @@ CREATE [ OR REPLACE ] RULE <replaceable class="parameter">name</replaceable> AS
<para>
The query trees generated from rule actions are thrown into the
rewrite system again, and maybe more rules get applied resulting
- in more or less query trees.
+ in additional or fewer query trees.
So a rule's actions must have either a different
command type or a different result relation than the rule itself is
on, otherwise this recursive process will end up in an infinite loop.
diff --git a/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c b/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c
index 24a27e387d..0b56b0fa5a 100644
--- a/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c
+++ b/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c
@@ -719,11 +719,11 @@ heap_copytuple_with_tuple(HeapTuple src, HeapTuple dest)
}
/*
- * Expand a tuple which has less attributes than required. For each attribute
+ * Expand a tuple which has fewer attributes than required. For each attribute
* not present in the sourceTuple, if there is a missing value that will be
* used. Otherwise the attribute will be set to NULL.
*
- * The source tuple must have less attributes than the required number.
+ * The source tuple must have fewer attributes than the required number.
*
* Only one of targetHeapTuple and targetMinimalTuple may be supplied. The
* other argument must be NULL.
diff --git a/src/backend/commands/analyze.c b/src/backend/commands/analyze.c
index 7295cf0215..64908ac39c 100644
--- a/src/backend/commands/analyze.c
+++ b/src/backend/commands/analyze.c
@@ -1003,7 +1003,7 @@ examine_attribute(Relation onerel, int attnum, Node *index_expr)
* As of May 2004 we use a new two-stage method: Stage one selects up
* to targrows random blocks (or all blocks, if there aren't so many).
* Stage two scans these blocks and uses the Vitter algorithm to create
- * a random sample of targrows rows (or less, if there are less in the
+ * a random sample of targrows rows (or fewer, if there are fewer in the
* sample of blocks). The two stages are executed simultaneously: each
* block is processed as soon as stage one returns its number and while
* the rows are read stage two controls which ones are to be inserted
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c b/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c
index 4d185c27b4..078aaef539 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c
@@ -263,7 +263,7 @@ static int compareDatetime(Datum val1, Oid typid1, Datum val2, Oid typid2,
* implement @? and @@ operators, which in turn are intended to have an
* index support. Thus, it's desirable to make it easier to achieve
* consistency between index scan results and sequential scan results.
- * So, we throw as less errors as possible. Regarding this function,
+ * So, we throw as few errors as possible. Regarding this function,
* such behavior also matches behavior of JSON_EXISTS() clause of
* SQL/JSON. Regarding jsonb_path_match(), this function doesn't have
* an analogy in SQL/JSON, so we define its behavior on our own.
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c b/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c
index 47ca4ddbb5..52314d3aa1 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c
@@ -645,7 +645,7 @@ scalarineqsel(PlannerInfo *root, Oid operator, bool isgt, bool iseq,
/*
* The calculation so far gave us a selectivity for the "<=" case.
- * We'll have one less tuple for "<" and one additional tuple for
+ * We'll have one fewer tuple for "<" and one additional tuple for
* ">=", the latter of which we'll reverse the selectivity for
* below, so we can simply subtract one tuple for both cases. The
* cases that need this adjustment can be identified by iseq being
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c b/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c
index fa2b49c676..55c9445898 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c
@@ -1497,7 +1497,7 @@ GetCatCacheHashValue(CatCache *cache,
* It doesn't make any sense to specify all of the cache's key columns
* here: since the key is unique, there could be at most one match, so
* you ought to use SearchCatCache() instead. Hence this function takes
- * one less Datum argument than SearchCatCache() does.
+ * one fewer Datum argument than SearchCatCache() does.
*
* The caller must not modify the list object or the pointed-to tuples,
* and must call ReleaseCatCacheList() when done with the list.
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c b/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c
index 0c327e823f..7348b86682 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c
@@ -42,7 +42,7 @@ BlockSampler_Init(BlockSampler bs, BlockNumber nblocks, int samplesize,
bs->N = nblocks; /* measured table size */
/*
- * If we decide to reduce samplesize for tables that have less or not much
+ * If we decide to reduce samplesize for tables that have fewer or not much
* more than samplesize blocks, here is the place to do it.
*/
bs->n = samplesize;
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c b/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c
index e4ee1aab97..10a1effb74 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c
@@ -495,7 +495,7 @@ FreePageManagerDump(FreePageManager *fpm)
* if we search the parent page for the first key greater than or equal to
* the first key on the current page, the downlink to this page will be either
* the exact index returned by the search (if the first key decreased)
- * or one less (if the first key increased).
+ * or one fewer (if the first key increased).
*/
static void
FreePageBtreeAdjustAncestorKeys(FreePageManager *fpm, FreePageBtree *btp)
diff --git a/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c b/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c
index a4a3f40048..627a244fb7 100644
--- a/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c
+++ b/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c
@@ -6458,7 +6458,7 @@ threadRun(void *arg)
/*
* If advanceConnectionState changed client to finished state,
- * that's one less client that remains.
+ * that's one fewer client that remains.
*/
if (st->state == CSTATE_FINISHED || st->state == CSTATE_ABORTED)
remains--;
diff --git a/src/include/pg_config_manual.h b/src/include/pg_config_manual.h
index d27c8601fa..e3d2e751ea 100644
--- a/src/include/pg_config_manual.h
+++ b/src/include/pg_config_manual.h
@@ -21,7 +21,7 @@
/*
* Maximum length for identifiers (e.g. table names, column names,
- * function names). Names actually are limited to one less byte than this,
+ * function names). Names actually are limited to one fewer byte than this,
* because the length must include a trailing zero byte.
*
* Changing this requires an initdb.
@@ -87,7 +87,7 @@
/*
* MAXPGPATH: standard size of a pathname buffer in PostgreSQL (hence,
- * maximum usable pathname length is one less).
+ * maximum usable pathname length is one fewer).
*
* We'd use a standard system header symbol for this, if there weren't
* so many to choose from: MAXPATHLEN, MAX_PATH, PATH_MAX are all
diff --git a/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h b/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h
index 67d3c7b4e4..9e73f1f1b1 100644
--- a/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h
+++ b/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h
@@ -7,7 +7,7 @@
/*
* Maximum length for identifiers (e.g. table names, column names,
- * function names). Names actually are limited to one less byte than this,
+ * function names). Names actually are limited to one fewer byte than this,
* because the length must include a trailing zero byte.
*
* This should be at least as much as NAMEDATALEN of the database the
diff --git a/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out b/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out
index 84f7eabb66..9799cfbdbd 100644
--- a/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out
+++ b/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out
@@ -4325,7 +4325,7 @@ SELECT f1, polygon(8, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
<(100,1),115> | ((-15,1),(18.6827201635,82.3172798365),(100,116),(181.317279836,82.3172798365),(215,1),(181.317279836,-80.3172798365),(100,-114),(18.6827201635,-80.3172798365))
(6 rows)
--- Too less points error
+-- Too few points error
SELECT f1, polygon(1, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
ERROR: must request at least 2 points
-- Zero radius error
diff --git a/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql b/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql
index 96df0ab05a..b0ab6d03ec 100644
--- a/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql
+++ b/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql
@@ -424,7 +424,7 @@ SELECT f1, f1::polygon FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
-- To polygon with less points
SELECT f1, polygon(8, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
--- Too less points error
+-- Too few points error
SELECT f1, polygon(1, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
-- Zero radius error
--
2.17.0
--lc9FT7cWel8HagAv
Content-Type: text/x-diff; charset=us-ascii
Content-Disposition: attachment;
filename="0007-function-comment-get_am_name.patch"
^ permalink raw reply [nested|flat] 25+ messages in thread
* [PATCH 06/18] One fewer (not one less)
@ 2021-01-18 20:37 Justin Pryzby <[email protected]>
0 siblings, 0 replies; 25+ messages in thread
From: Justin Pryzby @ 2021-01-18 20:37 UTC (permalink / raw)
---
contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c | 2 +-
doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml | 2 +-
doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml | 2 +-
doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml | 2 +-
src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c | 4 ++--
src/backend/commands/analyze.c | 2 +-
src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c | 2 +-
src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c | 2 +-
src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c | 2 +-
src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c | 2 +-
src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c | 2 +-
src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c | 2 +-
src/include/pg_config_manual.h | 4 ++--
src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h | 2 +-
src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out | 2 +-
src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql | 2 +-
16 files changed, 18 insertions(+), 18 deletions(-)
diff --git a/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c b/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c
index 9abcee32af..f6760eb31e 100644
--- a/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c
+++ b/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c
@@ -338,7 +338,7 @@ tuple_data_split_internal(Oid relid, char *tupdata,
attr = TupleDescAttr(tupdesc, i);
/*
- * Tuple header can specify less attributes than tuple descriptor as
+ * Tuple header can specify fewer attributes than tuple descriptor as
* ALTER TABLE ADD COLUMN without DEFAULT keyword does not actually
* change tuples in pages, so attributes with numbers greater than
* (t_infomask2 & HEAP_NATTS_MASK) should be treated as NULL.
diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml
index cebc09ef91..1b00e543a6 100644
--- a/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml
+++ b/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml
@@ -619,7 +619,7 @@ SELECT * FROM test1 ORDER BY a || b COLLATE "fr_FR";
name such as <literal>de_DE</literal> can be considered unique
within a given database even though it would not be unique globally.
Use of the stripped collation names is recommended, since it will
- make one less thing you need to change if you decide to change to
+ make one fewer thing you need to change if you decide to change to
another database encoding. Note however that the <literal>default</literal>,
<literal>C</literal>, and <literal>POSIX</literal> collations can be used regardless of
the database encoding.
diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml
index 0b24a55505..693423e524 100644
--- a/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml
+++ b/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml
@@ -867,7 +867,7 @@ CREATE TYPE <replaceable class="parameter">name</replaceable>
Before <productname>PostgreSQL</productname> version 8.3, the name of
a generated array type was always exactly the element type's name with one
underscore character (<literal>_</literal>) prepended. (Type names were
- therefore restricted in length to one less character than other names.)
+ therefore restricted in length to one fewer character than other names.)
While this is still usually the case, the array type name may vary from
this in case of maximum-length names or collisions with user type names
that begin with underscore. Writing code that depends on this convention
diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml
index e81addcfa9..aa172d102b 100644
--- a/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml
+++ b/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml
@@ -1266,7 +1266,7 @@ CREATE [ OR REPLACE ] RULE <replaceable class="parameter">name</replaceable> AS
<para>
The query trees generated from rule actions are thrown into the
rewrite system again, and maybe more rules get applied resulting
- in more or less query trees.
+ in additional or fewer query trees.
So a rule's actions must have either a different
command type or a different result relation than the rule itself is
on, otherwise this recursive process will end up in an infinite loop.
diff --git a/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c b/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c
index 24a27e387d..0b56b0fa5a 100644
--- a/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c
+++ b/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c
@@ -719,11 +719,11 @@ heap_copytuple_with_tuple(HeapTuple src, HeapTuple dest)
}
/*
- * Expand a tuple which has less attributes than required. For each attribute
+ * Expand a tuple which has fewer attributes than required. For each attribute
* not present in the sourceTuple, if there is a missing value that will be
* used. Otherwise the attribute will be set to NULL.
*
- * The source tuple must have less attributes than the required number.
+ * The source tuple must have fewer attributes than the required number.
*
* Only one of targetHeapTuple and targetMinimalTuple may be supplied. The
* other argument must be NULL.
diff --git a/src/backend/commands/analyze.c b/src/backend/commands/analyze.c
index 7295cf0215..64908ac39c 100644
--- a/src/backend/commands/analyze.c
+++ b/src/backend/commands/analyze.c
@@ -1003,7 +1003,7 @@ examine_attribute(Relation onerel, int attnum, Node *index_expr)
* As of May 2004 we use a new two-stage method: Stage one selects up
* to targrows random blocks (or all blocks, if there aren't so many).
* Stage two scans these blocks and uses the Vitter algorithm to create
- * a random sample of targrows rows (or less, if there are less in the
+ * a random sample of targrows rows (or fewer, if there are fewer in the
* sample of blocks). The two stages are executed simultaneously: each
* block is processed as soon as stage one returns its number and while
* the rows are read stage two controls which ones are to be inserted
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c b/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c
index 4d185c27b4..078aaef539 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c
@@ -263,7 +263,7 @@ static int compareDatetime(Datum val1, Oid typid1, Datum val2, Oid typid2,
* implement @? and @@ operators, which in turn are intended to have an
* index support. Thus, it's desirable to make it easier to achieve
* consistency between index scan results and sequential scan results.
- * So, we throw as less errors as possible. Regarding this function,
+ * So, we throw as few errors as possible. Regarding this function,
* such behavior also matches behavior of JSON_EXISTS() clause of
* SQL/JSON. Regarding jsonb_path_match(), this function doesn't have
* an analogy in SQL/JSON, so we define its behavior on our own.
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c b/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c
index 47ca4ddbb5..52314d3aa1 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c
@@ -645,7 +645,7 @@ scalarineqsel(PlannerInfo *root, Oid operator, bool isgt, bool iseq,
/*
* The calculation so far gave us a selectivity for the "<=" case.
- * We'll have one less tuple for "<" and one additional tuple for
+ * We'll have one fewer tuple for "<" and one additional tuple for
* ">=", the latter of which we'll reverse the selectivity for
* below, so we can simply subtract one tuple for both cases. The
* cases that need this adjustment can be identified by iseq being
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c b/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c
index fa2b49c676..55c9445898 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c
@@ -1497,7 +1497,7 @@ GetCatCacheHashValue(CatCache *cache,
* It doesn't make any sense to specify all of the cache's key columns
* here: since the key is unique, there could be at most one match, so
* you ought to use SearchCatCache() instead. Hence this function takes
- * one less Datum argument than SearchCatCache() does.
+ * one fewer Datum argument than SearchCatCache() does.
*
* The caller must not modify the list object or the pointed-to tuples,
* and must call ReleaseCatCacheList() when done with the list.
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c b/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c
index 0c327e823f..7348b86682 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c
@@ -42,7 +42,7 @@ BlockSampler_Init(BlockSampler bs, BlockNumber nblocks, int samplesize,
bs->N = nblocks; /* measured table size */
/*
- * If we decide to reduce samplesize for tables that have less or not much
+ * If we decide to reduce samplesize for tables that have fewer or not much
* more than samplesize blocks, here is the place to do it.
*/
bs->n = samplesize;
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c b/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c
index e4ee1aab97..10a1effb74 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c
@@ -495,7 +495,7 @@ FreePageManagerDump(FreePageManager *fpm)
* if we search the parent page for the first key greater than or equal to
* the first key on the current page, the downlink to this page will be either
* the exact index returned by the search (if the first key decreased)
- * or one less (if the first key increased).
+ * or one fewer (if the first key increased).
*/
static void
FreePageBtreeAdjustAncestorKeys(FreePageManager *fpm, FreePageBtree *btp)
diff --git a/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c b/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c
index a4a3f40048..627a244fb7 100644
--- a/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c
+++ b/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c
@@ -6458,7 +6458,7 @@ threadRun(void *arg)
/*
* If advanceConnectionState changed client to finished state,
- * that's one less client that remains.
+ * that's one fewer client that remains.
*/
if (st->state == CSTATE_FINISHED || st->state == CSTATE_ABORTED)
remains--;
diff --git a/src/include/pg_config_manual.h b/src/include/pg_config_manual.h
index d27c8601fa..e3d2e751ea 100644
--- a/src/include/pg_config_manual.h
+++ b/src/include/pg_config_manual.h
@@ -21,7 +21,7 @@
/*
* Maximum length for identifiers (e.g. table names, column names,
- * function names). Names actually are limited to one less byte than this,
+ * function names). Names actually are limited to one fewer byte than this,
* because the length must include a trailing zero byte.
*
* Changing this requires an initdb.
@@ -87,7 +87,7 @@
/*
* MAXPGPATH: standard size of a pathname buffer in PostgreSQL (hence,
- * maximum usable pathname length is one less).
+ * maximum usable pathname length is one fewer).
*
* We'd use a standard system header symbol for this, if there weren't
* so many to choose from: MAXPATHLEN, MAX_PATH, PATH_MAX are all
diff --git a/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h b/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h
index 67d3c7b4e4..9e73f1f1b1 100644
--- a/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h
+++ b/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h
@@ -7,7 +7,7 @@
/*
* Maximum length for identifiers (e.g. table names, column names,
- * function names). Names actually are limited to one less byte than this,
+ * function names). Names actually are limited to one fewer byte than this,
* because the length must include a trailing zero byte.
*
* This should be at least as much as NAMEDATALEN of the database the
diff --git a/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out b/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out
index 84f7eabb66..9799cfbdbd 100644
--- a/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out
+++ b/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out
@@ -4325,7 +4325,7 @@ SELECT f1, polygon(8, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
<(100,1),115> | ((-15,1),(18.6827201635,82.3172798365),(100,116),(181.317279836,82.3172798365),(215,1),(181.317279836,-80.3172798365),(100,-114),(18.6827201635,-80.3172798365))
(6 rows)
--- Too less points error
+-- Too few points error
SELECT f1, polygon(1, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
ERROR: must request at least 2 points
-- Zero radius error
diff --git a/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql b/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql
index 96df0ab05a..b0ab6d03ec 100644
--- a/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql
+++ b/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql
@@ -424,7 +424,7 @@ SELECT f1, f1::polygon FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
-- To polygon with less points
SELECT f1, polygon(8, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
--- Too less points error
+-- Too few points error
SELECT f1, polygon(1, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
-- Zero radius error
--
2.17.0
--lc9FT7cWel8HagAv
Content-Type: text/x-diff; charset=us-ascii
Content-Disposition: attachment;
filename="0007-function-comment-get_am_name.patch"
^ permalink raw reply [nested|flat] 25+ messages in thread
* [PATCH 06/18] One fewer (not one less)
@ 2021-01-18 20:37 Justin Pryzby <[email protected]>
0 siblings, 0 replies; 25+ messages in thread
From: Justin Pryzby @ 2021-01-18 20:37 UTC (permalink / raw)
---
contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c | 2 +-
doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml | 2 +-
doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml | 2 +-
doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml | 2 +-
src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c | 4 ++--
src/backend/commands/analyze.c | 2 +-
src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c | 2 +-
src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c | 2 +-
src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c | 2 +-
src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c | 2 +-
src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c | 2 +-
src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c | 2 +-
src/include/pg_config_manual.h | 4 ++--
src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h | 2 +-
src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out | 2 +-
src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql | 2 +-
16 files changed, 18 insertions(+), 18 deletions(-)
diff --git a/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c b/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c
index 9abcee32af..f6760eb31e 100644
--- a/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c
+++ b/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c
@@ -338,7 +338,7 @@ tuple_data_split_internal(Oid relid, char *tupdata,
attr = TupleDescAttr(tupdesc, i);
/*
- * Tuple header can specify less attributes than tuple descriptor as
+ * Tuple header can specify fewer attributes than tuple descriptor as
* ALTER TABLE ADD COLUMN without DEFAULT keyword does not actually
* change tuples in pages, so attributes with numbers greater than
* (t_infomask2 & HEAP_NATTS_MASK) should be treated as NULL.
diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml
index cebc09ef91..1b00e543a6 100644
--- a/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml
+++ b/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml
@@ -619,7 +619,7 @@ SELECT * FROM test1 ORDER BY a || b COLLATE "fr_FR";
name such as <literal>de_DE</literal> can be considered unique
within a given database even though it would not be unique globally.
Use of the stripped collation names is recommended, since it will
- make one less thing you need to change if you decide to change to
+ make one fewer thing you need to change if you decide to change to
another database encoding. Note however that the <literal>default</literal>,
<literal>C</literal>, and <literal>POSIX</literal> collations can be used regardless of
the database encoding.
diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml
index 0b24a55505..693423e524 100644
--- a/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml
+++ b/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml
@@ -867,7 +867,7 @@ CREATE TYPE <replaceable class="parameter">name</replaceable>
Before <productname>PostgreSQL</productname> version 8.3, the name of
a generated array type was always exactly the element type's name with one
underscore character (<literal>_</literal>) prepended. (Type names were
- therefore restricted in length to one less character than other names.)
+ therefore restricted in length to one fewer character than other names.)
While this is still usually the case, the array type name may vary from
this in case of maximum-length names or collisions with user type names
that begin with underscore. Writing code that depends on this convention
diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml
index e81addcfa9..aa172d102b 100644
--- a/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml
+++ b/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml
@@ -1266,7 +1266,7 @@ CREATE [ OR REPLACE ] RULE <replaceable class="parameter">name</replaceable> AS
<para>
The query trees generated from rule actions are thrown into the
rewrite system again, and maybe more rules get applied resulting
- in more or less query trees.
+ in additional or fewer query trees.
So a rule's actions must have either a different
command type or a different result relation than the rule itself is
on, otherwise this recursive process will end up in an infinite loop.
diff --git a/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c b/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c
index 24a27e387d..0b56b0fa5a 100644
--- a/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c
+++ b/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c
@@ -719,11 +719,11 @@ heap_copytuple_with_tuple(HeapTuple src, HeapTuple dest)
}
/*
- * Expand a tuple which has less attributes than required. For each attribute
+ * Expand a tuple which has fewer attributes than required. For each attribute
* not present in the sourceTuple, if there is a missing value that will be
* used. Otherwise the attribute will be set to NULL.
*
- * The source tuple must have less attributes than the required number.
+ * The source tuple must have fewer attributes than the required number.
*
* Only one of targetHeapTuple and targetMinimalTuple may be supplied. The
* other argument must be NULL.
diff --git a/src/backend/commands/analyze.c b/src/backend/commands/analyze.c
index 7295cf0215..64908ac39c 100644
--- a/src/backend/commands/analyze.c
+++ b/src/backend/commands/analyze.c
@@ -1003,7 +1003,7 @@ examine_attribute(Relation onerel, int attnum, Node *index_expr)
* As of May 2004 we use a new two-stage method: Stage one selects up
* to targrows random blocks (or all blocks, if there aren't so many).
* Stage two scans these blocks and uses the Vitter algorithm to create
- * a random sample of targrows rows (or less, if there are less in the
+ * a random sample of targrows rows (or fewer, if there are fewer in the
* sample of blocks). The two stages are executed simultaneously: each
* block is processed as soon as stage one returns its number and while
* the rows are read stage two controls which ones are to be inserted
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c b/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c
index 4d185c27b4..078aaef539 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c
@@ -263,7 +263,7 @@ static int compareDatetime(Datum val1, Oid typid1, Datum val2, Oid typid2,
* implement @? and @@ operators, which in turn are intended to have an
* index support. Thus, it's desirable to make it easier to achieve
* consistency between index scan results and sequential scan results.
- * So, we throw as less errors as possible. Regarding this function,
+ * So, we throw as few errors as possible. Regarding this function,
* such behavior also matches behavior of JSON_EXISTS() clause of
* SQL/JSON. Regarding jsonb_path_match(), this function doesn't have
* an analogy in SQL/JSON, so we define its behavior on our own.
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c b/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c
index 47ca4ddbb5..52314d3aa1 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c
@@ -645,7 +645,7 @@ scalarineqsel(PlannerInfo *root, Oid operator, bool isgt, bool iseq,
/*
* The calculation so far gave us a selectivity for the "<=" case.
- * We'll have one less tuple for "<" and one additional tuple for
+ * We'll have one fewer tuple for "<" and one additional tuple for
* ">=", the latter of which we'll reverse the selectivity for
* below, so we can simply subtract one tuple for both cases. The
* cases that need this adjustment can be identified by iseq being
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c b/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c
index fa2b49c676..55c9445898 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c
@@ -1497,7 +1497,7 @@ GetCatCacheHashValue(CatCache *cache,
* It doesn't make any sense to specify all of the cache's key columns
* here: since the key is unique, there could be at most one match, so
* you ought to use SearchCatCache() instead. Hence this function takes
- * one less Datum argument than SearchCatCache() does.
+ * one fewer Datum argument than SearchCatCache() does.
*
* The caller must not modify the list object or the pointed-to tuples,
* and must call ReleaseCatCacheList() when done with the list.
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c b/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c
index 0c327e823f..7348b86682 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c
@@ -42,7 +42,7 @@ BlockSampler_Init(BlockSampler bs, BlockNumber nblocks, int samplesize,
bs->N = nblocks; /* measured table size */
/*
- * If we decide to reduce samplesize for tables that have less or not much
+ * If we decide to reduce samplesize for tables that have fewer or not much
* more than samplesize blocks, here is the place to do it.
*/
bs->n = samplesize;
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c b/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c
index e4ee1aab97..10a1effb74 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c
@@ -495,7 +495,7 @@ FreePageManagerDump(FreePageManager *fpm)
* if we search the parent page for the first key greater than or equal to
* the first key on the current page, the downlink to this page will be either
* the exact index returned by the search (if the first key decreased)
- * or one less (if the first key increased).
+ * or one fewer (if the first key increased).
*/
static void
FreePageBtreeAdjustAncestorKeys(FreePageManager *fpm, FreePageBtree *btp)
diff --git a/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c b/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c
index a4a3f40048..627a244fb7 100644
--- a/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c
+++ b/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c
@@ -6458,7 +6458,7 @@ threadRun(void *arg)
/*
* If advanceConnectionState changed client to finished state,
- * that's one less client that remains.
+ * that's one fewer client that remains.
*/
if (st->state == CSTATE_FINISHED || st->state == CSTATE_ABORTED)
remains--;
diff --git a/src/include/pg_config_manual.h b/src/include/pg_config_manual.h
index d27c8601fa..e3d2e751ea 100644
--- a/src/include/pg_config_manual.h
+++ b/src/include/pg_config_manual.h
@@ -21,7 +21,7 @@
/*
* Maximum length for identifiers (e.g. table names, column names,
- * function names). Names actually are limited to one less byte than this,
+ * function names). Names actually are limited to one fewer byte than this,
* because the length must include a trailing zero byte.
*
* Changing this requires an initdb.
@@ -87,7 +87,7 @@
/*
* MAXPGPATH: standard size of a pathname buffer in PostgreSQL (hence,
- * maximum usable pathname length is one less).
+ * maximum usable pathname length is one fewer).
*
* We'd use a standard system header symbol for this, if there weren't
* so many to choose from: MAXPATHLEN, MAX_PATH, PATH_MAX are all
diff --git a/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h b/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h
index 67d3c7b4e4..9e73f1f1b1 100644
--- a/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h
+++ b/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h
@@ -7,7 +7,7 @@
/*
* Maximum length for identifiers (e.g. table names, column names,
- * function names). Names actually are limited to one less byte than this,
+ * function names). Names actually are limited to one fewer byte than this,
* because the length must include a trailing zero byte.
*
* This should be at least as much as NAMEDATALEN of the database the
diff --git a/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out b/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out
index 84f7eabb66..9799cfbdbd 100644
--- a/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out
+++ b/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out
@@ -4325,7 +4325,7 @@ SELECT f1, polygon(8, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
<(100,1),115> | ((-15,1),(18.6827201635,82.3172798365),(100,116),(181.317279836,82.3172798365),(215,1),(181.317279836,-80.3172798365),(100,-114),(18.6827201635,-80.3172798365))
(6 rows)
--- Too less points error
+-- Too few points error
SELECT f1, polygon(1, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
ERROR: must request at least 2 points
-- Zero radius error
diff --git a/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql b/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql
index 96df0ab05a..b0ab6d03ec 100644
--- a/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql
+++ b/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql
@@ -424,7 +424,7 @@ SELECT f1, f1::polygon FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
-- To polygon with less points
SELECT f1, polygon(8, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
--- Too less points error
+-- Too few points error
SELECT f1, polygon(1, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
-- Zero radius error
--
2.17.0
--lc9FT7cWel8HagAv
Content-Type: text/x-diff; charset=us-ascii
Content-Disposition: attachment;
filename="0007-function-comment-get_am_name.patch"
^ permalink raw reply [nested|flat] 25+ messages in thread
* [PATCH 06/18] One fewer (not one less)
@ 2021-01-18 20:37 Justin Pryzby <[email protected]>
0 siblings, 0 replies; 25+ messages in thread
From: Justin Pryzby @ 2021-01-18 20:37 UTC (permalink / raw)
---
contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c | 2 +-
doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml | 2 +-
doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml | 2 +-
doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml | 2 +-
src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c | 4 ++--
src/backend/commands/analyze.c | 2 +-
src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c | 2 +-
src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c | 2 +-
src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c | 2 +-
src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c | 2 +-
src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c | 2 +-
src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c | 2 +-
src/include/pg_config_manual.h | 4 ++--
src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h | 2 +-
src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out | 2 +-
src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql | 2 +-
16 files changed, 18 insertions(+), 18 deletions(-)
diff --git a/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c b/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c
index 9abcee32af..f6760eb31e 100644
--- a/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c
+++ b/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c
@@ -338,7 +338,7 @@ tuple_data_split_internal(Oid relid, char *tupdata,
attr = TupleDescAttr(tupdesc, i);
/*
- * Tuple header can specify less attributes than tuple descriptor as
+ * Tuple header can specify fewer attributes than tuple descriptor as
* ALTER TABLE ADD COLUMN without DEFAULT keyword does not actually
* change tuples in pages, so attributes with numbers greater than
* (t_infomask2 & HEAP_NATTS_MASK) should be treated as NULL.
diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml
index cebc09ef91..1b00e543a6 100644
--- a/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml
+++ b/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml
@@ -619,7 +619,7 @@ SELECT * FROM test1 ORDER BY a || b COLLATE "fr_FR";
name such as <literal>de_DE</literal> can be considered unique
within a given database even though it would not be unique globally.
Use of the stripped collation names is recommended, since it will
- make one less thing you need to change if you decide to change to
+ make one fewer thing you need to change if you decide to change to
another database encoding. Note however that the <literal>default</literal>,
<literal>C</literal>, and <literal>POSIX</literal> collations can be used regardless of
the database encoding.
diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml
index 0b24a55505..693423e524 100644
--- a/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml
+++ b/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml
@@ -867,7 +867,7 @@ CREATE TYPE <replaceable class="parameter">name</replaceable>
Before <productname>PostgreSQL</productname> version 8.3, the name of
a generated array type was always exactly the element type's name with one
underscore character (<literal>_</literal>) prepended. (Type names were
- therefore restricted in length to one less character than other names.)
+ therefore restricted in length to one fewer character than other names.)
While this is still usually the case, the array type name may vary from
this in case of maximum-length names or collisions with user type names
that begin with underscore. Writing code that depends on this convention
diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml
index e81addcfa9..aa172d102b 100644
--- a/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml
+++ b/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml
@@ -1266,7 +1266,7 @@ CREATE [ OR REPLACE ] RULE <replaceable class="parameter">name</replaceable> AS
<para>
The query trees generated from rule actions are thrown into the
rewrite system again, and maybe more rules get applied resulting
- in more or less query trees.
+ in additional or fewer query trees.
So a rule's actions must have either a different
command type or a different result relation than the rule itself is
on, otherwise this recursive process will end up in an infinite loop.
diff --git a/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c b/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c
index 24a27e387d..0b56b0fa5a 100644
--- a/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c
+++ b/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c
@@ -719,11 +719,11 @@ heap_copytuple_with_tuple(HeapTuple src, HeapTuple dest)
}
/*
- * Expand a tuple which has less attributes than required. For each attribute
+ * Expand a tuple which has fewer attributes than required. For each attribute
* not present in the sourceTuple, if there is a missing value that will be
* used. Otherwise the attribute will be set to NULL.
*
- * The source tuple must have less attributes than the required number.
+ * The source tuple must have fewer attributes than the required number.
*
* Only one of targetHeapTuple and targetMinimalTuple may be supplied. The
* other argument must be NULL.
diff --git a/src/backend/commands/analyze.c b/src/backend/commands/analyze.c
index 7295cf0215..64908ac39c 100644
--- a/src/backend/commands/analyze.c
+++ b/src/backend/commands/analyze.c
@@ -1003,7 +1003,7 @@ examine_attribute(Relation onerel, int attnum, Node *index_expr)
* As of May 2004 we use a new two-stage method: Stage one selects up
* to targrows random blocks (or all blocks, if there aren't so many).
* Stage two scans these blocks and uses the Vitter algorithm to create
- * a random sample of targrows rows (or less, if there are less in the
+ * a random sample of targrows rows (or fewer, if there are fewer in the
* sample of blocks). The two stages are executed simultaneously: each
* block is processed as soon as stage one returns its number and while
* the rows are read stage two controls which ones are to be inserted
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c b/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c
index 4d185c27b4..078aaef539 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c
@@ -263,7 +263,7 @@ static int compareDatetime(Datum val1, Oid typid1, Datum val2, Oid typid2,
* implement @? and @@ operators, which in turn are intended to have an
* index support. Thus, it's desirable to make it easier to achieve
* consistency between index scan results and sequential scan results.
- * So, we throw as less errors as possible. Regarding this function,
+ * So, we throw as few errors as possible. Regarding this function,
* such behavior also matches behavior of JSON_EXISTS() clause of
* SQL/JSON. Regarding jsonb_path_match(), this function doesn't have
* an analogy in SQL/JSON, so we define its behavior on our own.
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c b/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c
index 47ca4ddbb5..52314d3aa1 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c
@@ -645,7 +645,7 @@ scalarineqsel(PlannerInfo *root, Oid operator, bool isgt, bool iseq,
/*
* The calculation so far gave us a selectivity for the "<=" case.
- * We'll have one less tuple for "<" and one additional tuple for
+ * We'll have one fewer tuple for "<" and one additional tuple for
* ">=", the latter of which we'll reverse the selectivity for
* below, so we can simply subtract one tuple for both cases. The
* cases that need this adjustment can be identified by iseq being
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c b/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c
index fa2b49c676..55c9445898 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c
@@ -1497,7 +1497,7 @@ GetCatCacheHashValue(CatCache *cache,
* It doesn't make any sense to specify all of the cache's key columns
* here: since the key is unique, there could be at most one match, so
* you ought to use SearchCatCache() instead. Hence this function takes
- * one less Datum argument than SearchCatCache() does.
+ * one fewer Datum argument than SearchCatCache() does.
*
* The caller must not modify the list object or the pointed-to tuples,
* and must call ReleaseCatCacheList() when done with the list.
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c b/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c
index 0c327e823f..7348b86682 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c
@@ -42,7 +42,7 @@ BlockSampler_Init(BlockSampler bs, BlockNumber nblocks, int samplesize,
bs->N = nblocks; /* measured table size */
/*
- * If we decide to reduce samplesize for tables that have less or not much
+ * If we decide to reduce samplesize for tables that have fewer or not much
* more than samplesize blocks, here is the place to do it.
*/
bs->n = samplesize;
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c b/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c
index e4ee1aab97..10a1effb74 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c
@@ -495,7 +495,7 @@ FreePageManagerDump(FreePageManager *fpm)
* if we search the parent page for the first key greater than or equal to
* the first key on the current page, the downlink to this page will be either
* the exact index returned by the search (if the first key decreased)
- * or one less (if the first key increased).
+ * or one fewer (if the first key increased).
*/
static void
FreePageBtreeAdjustAncestorKeys(FreePageManager *fpm, FreePageBtree *btp)
diff --git a/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c b/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c
index a4a3f40048..627a244fb7 100644
--- a/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c
+++ b/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c
@@ -6458,7 +6458,7 @@ threadRun(void *arg)
/*
* If advanceConnectionState changed client to finished state,
- * that's one less client that remains.
+ * that's one fewer client that remains.
*/
if (st->state == CSTATE_FINISHED || st->state == CSTATE_ABORTED)
remains--;
diff --git a/src/include/pg_config_manual.h b/src/include/pg_config_manual.h
index d27c8601fa..e3d2e751ea 100644
--- a/src/include/pg_config_manual.h
+++ b/src/include/pg_config_manual.h
@@ -21,7 +21,7 @@
/*
* Maximum length for identifiers (e.g. table names, column names,
- * function names). Names actually are limited to one less byte than this,
+ * function names). Names actually are limited to one fewer byte than this,
* because the length must include a trailing zero byte.
*
* Changing this requires an initdb.
@@ -87,7 +87,7 @@
/*
* MAXPGPATH: standard size of a pathname buffer in PostgreSQL (hence,
- * maximum usable pathname length is one less).
+ * maximum usable pathname length is one fewer).
*
* We'd use a standard system header symbol for this, if there weren't
* so many to choose from: MAXPATHLEN, MAX_PATH, PATH_MAX are all
diff --git a/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h b/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h
index 67d3c7b4e4..9e73f1f1b1 100644
--- a/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h
+++ b/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h
@@ -7,7 +7,7 @@
/*
* Maximum length for identifiers (e.g. table names, column names,
- * function names). Names actually are limited to one less byte than this,
+ * function names). Names actually are limited to one fewer byte than this,
* because the length must include a trailing zero byte.
*
* This should be at least as much as NAMEDATALEN of the database the
diff --git a/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out b/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out
index 84f7eabb66..9799cfbdbd 100644
--- a/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out
+++ b/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out
@@ -4325,7 +4325,7 @@ SELECT f1, polygon(8, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
<(100,1),115> | ((-15,1),(18.6827201635,82.3172798365),(100,116),(181.317279836,82.3172798365),(215,1),(181.317279836,-80.3172798365),(100,-114),(18.6827201635,-80.3172798365))
(6 rows)
--- Too less points error
+-- Too few points error
SELECT f1, polygon(1, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
ERROR: must request at least 2 points
-- Zero radius error
diff --git a/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql b/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql
index 96df0ab05a..b0ab6d03ec 100644
--- a/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql
+++ b/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql
@@ -424,7 +424,7 @@ SELECT f1, f1::polygon FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
-- To polygon with less points
SELECT f1, polygon(8, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
--- Too less points error
+-- Too few points error
SELECT f1, polygon(1, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
-- Zero radius error
--
2.17.0
--lc9FT7cWel8HagAv
Content-Type: text/x-diff; charset=us-ascii
Content-Disposition: attachment;
filename="0007-function-comment-get_am_name.patch"
^ permalink raw reply [nested|flat] 25+ messages in thread
* Re: pg_receivewal.exe unhandled exception in zlib1.dll
@ 2022-02-11 15:50 Andres Freund <[email protected]>
0 siblings, 1 reply; 25+ messages in thread
From: Andres Freund @ 2022-02-11 15:50 UTC (permalink / raw)
To: Juan José Santamaría Flecha <[email protected]>; +Cc: PostgreSQL Hackers <[email protected]>
Hi,
On 2022-02-11 16:33:11 +0100, Juan José Santamaría Flecha wrote:
> If you execute pg_receivewal.exe with the option "--compression-method
> gzip" it will fail with no error. You can see an error in the db log:
>
> 2022-02-10 11:46:32.725 CET [11664][walsender] [pg_receivewal][3/0:0] LOG:
> could not receive data from client: An existing connection was forcibly
> closed by the remote host.
>
> Tracing the execution you can see:
>
> Unhandled exception at 0x00007FFEA78C1208 (ucrtbase.dll) in An invalid
> parameter was passed to a function that considers invalid parameters fatal.
> ucrtbase.dll!00007ff8e8ae36a2() Unknown
> > zlib1.dll!gz_comp(gz_state * state, int flush) Line 111 C
> zlib1.dll!gz_write(gz_state * state, const void * buf, unsigned __int64
> len) Line 235 C
> pg_receivewal.exe!dir_write(void * f, const void * buf, unsigned __int64
> count) Line 300 C
> pg_receivewal.exe!ProcessXLogDataMsg(pg_conn * conn, StreamCtl * stream,
> char * copybuf, int len, unsigned __int64 * blockpos) Line 1150 C
> pg_receivewal.exe!HandleCopyStream(pg_conn * conn, StreamCtl * stream,
> unsigned __int64 * stoppos) Line 850 C
> pg_receivewal.exe!ReceiveXlogStream(pg_conn * conn, StreamCtl * stream)
> Line 605 C
> pg_receivewal.exe!StreamLog() Line 636 C
> pg_receivewal.exe!main(int argc, char * * argv) Line 1005 C
>
> The problem comes from the file descriptor passed to gzdopen() in
> 'src/bin/pg_basebackup/walmethods.c'. Using gzopen() instead, solves the
> issue without ifdefing for WIN32. Please find attached a patch for so.
I hit this as well. The problem is really caused by using a debug build of
postgres vs a production build of zlib. The use different C runtimes, with
different file descriptors. A lot of resources in the windows world are
unfortunately tied to the C runtime and that there can multiple C runtimes in
a single process.
Greetings,
Andres Freund
^ permalink raw reply [nested|flat] 25+ messages in thread
* Re: pg_receivewal.exe unhandled exception in zlib1.dll
@ 2022-02-14 06:31 Michael Paquier <[email protected]>
parent: Andres Freund <[email protected]>
0 siblings, 0 replies; 25+ messages in thread
From: Michael Paquier @ 2022-02-14 06:31 UTC (permalink / raw)
To: Andres Freund <[email protected]>; +Cc: Juan José Santamaría Flecha <[email protected]>; PostgreSQL Hackers <[email protected]>
On Fri, Feb 11, 2022 at 07:50:44AM -0800, Andres Freund wrote:
> On 2022-02-11 16:33:11 +0100, Juan José Santamaría Flecha wrote:
>> The problem comes from the file descriptor passed to gzdopen() in
>> 'src/bin/pg_basebackup/walmethods.c'. Using gzopen() instead, solves the
>> issue without ifdefing for WIN32. Please find attached a patch for so.
This looks wrong to me as gzclose() would close() the file descriptor
we pass in via gzdopen(), and some code paths of walmethods.c rely on
this assumption so this would leak fds on repeated errors.
> I hit this as well. The problem is really caused by using a debug build of
> postgres vs a production build of zlib. The use different C runtimes, with
> different file descriptors. A lot of resources in the windows world are
> unfortunately tied to the C runtime and that there can multiple C runtimes in
> a single process.
It may be worth warning about that at build time, or just document the
matter perhaps? I don't recall seeing any MSIs related to zlib that
have compile with the debug options.
--
Michael
Attachments:
[application/pgp-signature] signature.asc (833B, ../../[email protected]/2-signature.asc)
download
^ permalink raw reply [nested|flat] 25+ messages in thread
end of thread, other threads:[~2022-02-14 06:31 UTC | newest]
Thread overview: 25+ messages (download: mbox mbox.gz follow: Atom feed)
-- links below jump to the message on this page --
2021-01-18 20:37 [PATCH 06/21] One fewer (not one less) Justin Pryzby <[email protected]>
2021-01-18 20:37 [PATCH 06/18] One fewer (not one less) Justin Pryzby <[email protected]>
2021-01-18 20:37 [PATCH 06/18] One fewer (not one less) Justin Pryzby <[email protected]>
2021-01-18 20:37 [PATCH 06/18] One fewer (not one less) Justin Pryzby <[email protected]>
2021-01-18 20:37 [PATCH 06/18] One fewer (not one less) Justin Pryzby <[email protected]>
2021-01-18 20:37 [PATCH 06/18] One fewer (not one less) Justin Pryzby <[email protected]>
2021-01-18 20:37 [PATCH 06/18] One fewer (not one less) Justin Pryzby <[email protected]>
2021-01-18 20:37 [PATCH 06/18] One fewer (not one less) Justin Pryzby <[email protected]>
2021-01-18 20:37 [PATCH 06/18] One fewer (not one less) Justin Pryzby <[email protected]>
2021-01-18 20:37 [PATCH 06/18] One fewer (not one less) Justin Pryzby <[email protected]>
2021-01-18 20:37 [PATCH 06/18] One fewer (not one less) Justin Pryzby <[email protected]>
2021-01-18 20:37 [PATCH 06/18] One fewer (not one less) Justin Pryzby <[email protected]>
2021-01-18 20:37 [PATCH 06/18] One fewer (not one less) Justin Pryzby <[email protected]>
2021-01-18 20:37 [PATCH 06/18] One fewer (not one less) Justin Pryzby <[email protected]>
2021-01-18 20:37 [PATCH 06/18] One fewer (not one less) Justin Pryzby <[email protected]>
2021-01-18 20:37 [PATCH 06/18] One fewer (not one less) Justin Pryzby <[email protected]>
2021-01-18 20:37 [PATCH 06/18] One fewer (not one less) Justin Pryzby <[email protected]>
2021-01-18 20:37 [PATCH 06/18] One fewer (not one less) Justin Pryzby <[email protected]>
2021-01-18 20:37 [PATCH 06/18] One fewer (not one less) Justin Pryzby <[email protected]>
2021-01-18 20:37 [PATCH 06/18] One fewer (not one less) Justin Pryzby <[email protected]>
2021-01-18 20:37 [PATCH 06/18] One fewer (not one less) Justin Pryzby <[email protected]>
2021-01-18 20:37 [PATCH 06/18] One fewer (not one less) Justin Pryzby <[email protected]>
2021-01-18 20:37 [PATCH 06/18] One fewer (not one less) Justin Pryzby <[email protected]>
2022-02-11 15:50 Re: pg_receivewal.exe unhandled exception in zlib1.dll Andres Freund <[email protected]>
2022-02-14 06:31 ` Re: pg_receivewal.exe unhandled exception in zlib1.dll Michael Paquier <[email protected]>
This inbox is served by agora; see mirroring instructions
for how to clone and mirror all data and code used for this inbox